Professional Documents
Culture Documents
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Facsimile
[ Version 3.0 ]
WARNING
This service information is designed for experienced repair technicians only and is not intended for use by the general public. It does not contain warnings or cautions to advise non-technical individuals of potential dangers in attempting to service a product. Products powered by electricity should be serviced or repaired only by experienced professional technicians. Any attempt to service or repair the product or products dealt within this service information by anyone else could result in serious injury or death.
2006 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Unauthorized copying and distribution is a violation of law.
This Product Uses Lead (Pb) Free Solder Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs).
Information regarding Lead-Free (PbF) solder: Distinction of PbF PCB: PCBs (manufactured) using lead free solder will have a mark following the PCB part numbers in a label on the PCB. Caution: Pb free solder has a higher melting point than standard solder; typically the melting point is 50 - 70 F (30 - 40 C) higher. Please use a soldering iron with temperature control and adjust it to 700 20 F (370 10 C). Exercise care while using higher temperature soldering irons, do not heat the PCB for too long to prevent solder splash or damage to the PCB. Pb free solder will tend to splash when heated too high (about 1100 F/600 C). ECO SOLDER M705 (available from Senju Metal Industry Co., Ltd.: URL: http://www.senju-m.co.jp) is recommended when repairing PbF PCBs.
The contents of this Service Manual and the Specifications are subject to change without notice. Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. reserves the right to make improvements in the product design without reservation and without notice. Published in Japan.
Important Notice
Please read this notice completely BEFORE repairing or installing any optional accessories. As failure to properly install the additional board or connector with the power ON could damage the machines SPC or SC board. Please follow the instructions below: 1. It is essential that you turn OFF the Main Power Switch located on the Left Side of the machine. 2. It is essential that you unplug the AC Power Cord from the wall outlet. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord.) 3. Please read the installation instructions carefully and follow each step. <Example: UF-9000>
Note: If the Hard Disk Drive Unit is installed, to prevent a Scan Disk Function from being performed (similar to when the power is abruptly interrupted to the PC), it is important to follow the step sequence below when turning OFF the Power Switch on the machine.
1. If the machine is in the "ENERGY SAVER (Shutdown Mode)", you may turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position. If it is not in the "ENERGY SAVER (Shutdown Mode)", continue to step 2 below. 2. Press "FUNCTION" and "ENERGY SAVER" keys simultaneously first. 3. Wait approximately 10 seconds while the machine writes the closing status onto the Hard Disk Drive Unit and advances into "ENERGY SAVER MODE". 4. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position. 5. Unplug the AC Power Cord. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord.) * The specifications are subject to change without notice. Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. reserves the right to make improvements in the product design without reservation and without notice.
Precautions
For Your Safety
To prevent severe injury and loss of life, read this section carefully before servicing the Panasonic machine to ensure proper and safe operation of your machine. Please ensure that the machine is installed near a wall outlet and is easily accessible. This section explains the Warnings and Cautions used in the machine and/or this manual.
WARNING: Denotes a potential hazard that could result in serious injury or death. CAUTION: Denotes hazards that could result in minor injury or damage to the machine.
This section also explains the Warnings and Cautions used in the machine and/or this manual. These symbols are used to alert operators to a specific operating procedure that must not be performed. These symbols are used to alert operators to a specific operating procedure that must be emphasized in order to operate the machine safely.
Once a month, unplug the machine and check the power cord for the following. If you notice any unusual condition, contact the authorized Panasonic dealer . The power cord is plugged firmly into the receptacle. The plug is not excessively heated, rusted, or bent. The plug and receptacle are free of dust. The cord is not cracked or frayed.
Operating Safeguards
Do not touch areas where these caution labels are attached to, the surface may be very hot and may cause severe burns. Do not place any liquid container such as a vase or coffee cup on the machine. Spilt water can cause fire or shock hazard. Do not place any metal parts such as staples or clips on the machine. If metal and flammable parts get into the machine, they can short-circuit internal components, and cause fire or electric shocks. If debris (metal or liquid) gets into the machine, switch Off and unplug the machine immediately. Operating a debris-contaminated machine can cause fire or electric shock. Do not try to alter the machine configuration or modify any parts. An unauthorized modification can cause smoke or fire.
Consumable Safeguards
Never dispose of toner, toner cartridge or a waste toner container into an open flame. Toner remaining in the cartridge can cause an explosion, burns and/or injuries. Keep button batteries/stamp out of the reach of children. If a button battery/stamp is swallowed accidentally, get medical treatment immediately.
When moving the machine, be sure to unplug the power cord from the outlet. If the machine is moved with the power cord attached, it can cause damage to the cord which could result in fire or electric shock.
CAUTION
Do not place a magnet near the safety switch of the machine. A magnet can activate the machine accidentally resulting in injuries. Do not use a highly flammable spray or solvent near the machine. It can cause fire. When copying a thick document, do not use excessive force to press it against the document glass. The glass may break and cause injuries. Never touch a labeled area found on or near the heat roller. You can get burnt. If a sheet of paper is wrapped around the heat roller, do not try to remove it when it is hot, to avoid injuries or burns. Switch Off the machine immediately, and wait until it cools down. Do not use conductive paper, e.g. folding paper, carbonic paper and coated paper. When a paper jam occurs, they can cause a short circuit and fire. Do not place any heavy object on the machine. An off-balance machine can tip-over or the heavy object can fall, causing damage and/or injuries. Keep the room ventilated when using the machine for an extended period of time to minimize the ozone density in the air. When copying with the document cover open, do not look directly at the exposure lamp. Direct eye exposure can cause eye fatigue or damage. Pull out paper trays slowly to prevent injuries. When removing jammed paper, make sure that no pieces of torn paper are left in the machine. A piece of paper remaining in the machine can cause fire. If a sheet of paper is wrapped around the heat roller, or when clearing a jammed paper that is difficult or impossible to see, do not try to remove it by yourself. Doing so can cause injuries or burns. Switch Off the machine immediately, and wait until it cools down.
CAUTION
Never heat the drum cartridge, or scratch its surface. A heated or scratched drum can be hazardous to your health. Do not mix new and old batteries together. Otherwise, batteries can burst or leak, causing fire or injuries. Be sure to use the specified type of batteries only. Ensure that batteries are installed with correct polarity. Incorrectly installed batteries can burst or leak, resulting in spillage or injuries.
Table of Contents
Specifications Table................................... 9
1.1. 1.2. 1.3. 1.4. 1.5. 1.6. 1.7. 1.8. Control Panel ............................................9 Copy Function.........................................11 Fax, Printer and Internet Fax Functions ................................................19 System Combination...............................29 Options List.............................................30 External View..........................................32 Clutches, Switches, Motors and Fan ......36 Sensors and PC Boards .........................36 6.4. Signal Waveform .................................. 203
8.7.
8.8. 8.9.
Troubleshooting ....................................... 88
4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4. 4.5. 4.6. 4.7. 4.8. 4.9. Initial Troubleshooting Flowchart ............88 Improper LCD Display ............................89 Printed Copy Quality Problems...............90 Document Feeder (ADF) ......................106 Communications ...................................109 Troubleshooting the LAN Interface .......115 Error Codes (For Copier) ......................123 Information Code Table (For Facsimile)......................................130 Diagnostic Codes (For Facsimile).........137
9.10. Troubleshooting from a PC .................. 327 9.11. Verifying the Configuration and Mail Account Type (SMTP or POP) ............. 328 9.12. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) - Extended Feature ................. 329
Table of Contents
9.13. Message Disposition Notifications (MDN) - Extended Feature ...................332 9.14. Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) - Extended Feature ..................336 9.15. Lightweight Challenge-response Mechanism POP (APOP) - Extended Feature ...............................336 9.16. SMTP Service Extension for Authentication (SMTP Auth) - Extended Feature ...............................338 9.17. Direct Internet Fax XMT - Extended Feature ...............................340
1 Specifications Table
1.1. Control Panel <Navy Blue Control Panel>
UF-9000 DP-180/190
9
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Note: LCD Display Brightness Adjustment To adjust the brightness of the LCD display, press and while holding down the "CLEAR" key, keep pressing the "ORIGINAL SIZE" or the "COPY SIZE" key until the desired brightness is achieved. ORIGINAL SIZE : Dimmer COPY SIZE : Brighter
10
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
1.2.
Copy Function
Copy Function Description UF-9000 DP-180 / 190 Desktop Fixed Left / Rear / Face Down Left / Center / Face UP Center Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) Electrostatic Indirect Laser Mono Component Non Magnetic Dry Toner No Heat & Pressure Letter / A4 / Legal Letter / Legal A4 / A5 A4 / A5 / B5 Letter / Legal / Invoice A4, FLS, A5 A4 / A5 / B5 / Postcard
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Items Basic Specifications 1 Type 2 Platen 3 Original Position Platen ADF 4 Recording Paper Path 5 Drum 6 Copy Process 7 Developing Process 8 9 10 11 Toner Recycle Fusing System Max Original Size Paper Size Paper Tray
Remarks
Legal: with ADF only For USA and Canada For EU For Other Destinations For USA and Canada For EU FLS = 8 x 13 in, 8.5 x 13 in For Other Destinations
Bypass 12 Media Type Standard Tray Optional Tray Bypass 13 Warm-up Time Power Saver Mode Sleep Mode Shutdown Mode Power On
Paper / Transparency Paper Paper / Transparency / Envelope / Label / Thick Paper 68 F (20 C) Approx. 15 sec Approx. 18 sec Scan: Platen; Size: Letter / A4; Orientation: Portrait; Paper Feed: 1st Paper Tray; Interval: From Pressing of Start Key to paper exiting to the Exit Tray; When LSU is ready. Paper Feed: 1st Paper Tray; Paper Exit: to Exit Tray; Continuous Copy Mode.
Approx. 10 sec
11
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
Items 16 Zoom Enlargement Reduction Zoom 17 Paper Feed Paper Tray Capacity Low Level Paper Warning Bypass Capacity Paper Capacity (Std. Configuration) 18 Multi Copy Range 19 Gradation Text Text / Photo Photo 20 Resolution Scan Mono Color Print (Mono) 21 Scanning type Color Scan Color Depth Mono Scan Standard Sorting Memory 22 Size 23 Standard Page Memory Size 24 Exit Tray Capacity 25 Dimensions (W x D x H) 26 Operating Space (W x D) 27 Weight
Copy Function Description UF-9000 DP-180 / 190 Selected Original size / Copy size Selected Original size / Copy size 50 - 200% Front Loading Universal Paper Tray 250 sheets x 1 Yes
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Remarks
1% Step
LTR / A4: 20 lb (75 g/m2) Orange Low Paper Level Indicator Paper / Transparency / Envelope / Label / Thick Paper / Postcard etc.
1 sheet 250 sheets 999 sheets Bi-Level 256 steps 256 steps
Max. 600 x 600 dpi Max. 300 x 300 dpi Max. 1200 (Interpolated) x 600 dpi Selectable 600 dpi, with Smoothing, the results are similar to PS3 / PCL6 Printers (1200 dpi Interpolated).
Yes 24 bit (16.7 Million colors) Yes 16 MB 32 MB 150 sheets 18.2 x 19.9 x 20.6 in (462 x 506 x 523 mm) 18.2 x 19.9 x 26.1 in (462 x 506 x 663 mm) 18.2 x 21.1 x 31.5 in (462 x 536 x 802 mm) 48.5 lb (22 kg) LTR / A4: 20 lb (75 g/m2)
12
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
Items Options 1 Paper Feed System 550 sheets 2nd Paper Feed Module Paper Size Detection Low Level Paper Warning Max. Paper Capacity 2 Sorting Image Memory Optional Image Memory 1 (16 MB) Optional Image Memory 2 (64 MB) Optional Image Memory 3 (128 MB) 3 Image Memory Expansion Flash Memory Card, 4 MB Expansion Flash Memory Card, 8 MB 4 Expansion Board 5 Hard Disk Drive 6 Handset 7 PCL Printer 8 PS / PCL Printer 9 Accounting Software 10 Deluxe Stand 11 Remote Diagnostic Software 12 Mechanical Counter Features 1 Automatic Features Auto Magnification Selection Auto Paper Selection Copy Print Auto Paper Tray Selection Auto Start Normal Operation Mode
Copy Function Description UF-9000 DP-180 / 190 550 sheets x 1 Yes Manual Yes 800 sheets
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Remarks
Control Panel Selectable Orange Low Paper Level Indicator LTR / A4: 20 lb (75 g/m2) (Tray 1 + 2) Unit comes standard with 16 MB. 1-Slot available for an Optional Image Memory module.
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Image Memory for Facsimile Required for PCL and PS Printing. 40 GB (2.5 inch) Requires the Optional Expansion Board. Requires the Optional Expansion Board. For Accounting Function
No No Yes Yes Yes 80 W Reservation while Power On Initializing Turns On the Heater Power.
13
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Remarks Turns Off the Heater Power. Automatically enters the Sleep or Shutdown Mode after 15 minutes from the Standby or Energy Saver Mode. Manually enters the Energy Saver Mode by pressing the Energy Saver key. Sleep or Shutdown mode is controlled by the General Functions setting. Turns Off the Power of Printer & Scanner. USB / Network Function not available
20 W
Sleep Mode Shutdown Mode Transmission (ADF) Transmission (Platen) Reception / Copy Max Remote Diagnostic Machine Stops when Out of Toner 2 Additional Features Low Level Paper indicator Photo Mode Original Detection Release Edit / Effects Book Mode Edge Mode Margin Mode X-Y Zoom Inverse Mode (Negative / Positive) Centering Mode Mirror Mode Image Repeat
12 W (100 VAC PS) 15 W (220 VAC PS) 1.5 W 45 W (100 VAC PS) 56 W (220 VAC PS) 40 W (100 VAC PS) 50 W (220 VAC PS) 900 W (100 VAC PS) 1000 W (220 VAC PS) 900 W (100 VAC PS) 1000 W (220 VAC PS) Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No
256 steps
14
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
Items Others (Inverting ADF & ADU) 2-Page Copy Mode 2 in 1 4 in 1 Booklet Mode Duplex Copy 12 21 22 Book2 Image Rotation (90 or 270 ) Electronic Sorting Rotation Sorting Insertion Job Department Counter ADF Mixed Size Original Feed JOB Build and SADF Mode Original Counter Job Memory Job Time Display Concurrent Copy Tandem Copy Mode Remote Copy Mode Scan Once Print Many Mode Job Completion Notice Trial Copy Mode Weekly Timer Function Mode Interrupt Electronic Counter Digital Sky Shot Mode Check / Slip Mode (Double Exposure) 3 Control Panel Display Status Lamp
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Remarks
No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No Yes No No Yes Yes* No No No Yes No No No Yes Yes No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes (1 jobs)
Check : Dimensions of a Bank check Slip : Dimensions of a Bank check with a statement 20 digits x 2 lines GREEN : Scanning / Printing RED : Alarm / Warning
LCD Yes
15
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
Items Key QWERTY Keyboard Directory Search (4 way) Original Size Copy Size Keypad Clear Stop Start Energy Saver Sort / Finish Function Mode Original Detection Release Interrupt Reset One-Touch key Mode Change LCD Main Indication Message Language (Default) Original Size / Image Indication Paper Size / Image Indication Paper Tray Selection Selected Paper Tray / Tray Status Original Mode Selection Copy Density Selection Setting Confirmation Function Classification Zoom Magnification Number of Copies Error Code Finishing
Copy Function Description UF-9000 DP-180 / 190 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No No Yes Yes Yes English (American) Specified Language Yes (without Image) Yes (without Image) No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Remarks
Copier / Printer / NW Scanner / Fax and Internet Fax Mode For USA and Canada For EU and Other Destinations
16
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
Items Warning Indicators No Toner No Paper Add Paper Indication Paper Jam Indication Paper Jam Location Service Alert Call User Error Machine Error History of Jam Errors 4 Main Unit Total Counter Electronic Mechanical Max. Weight of Documents on the Platen Glass ADF with Document Guide Clip Pocket Operating Instructions Pocket Warning / Caution Label 5 Optical System Original Size Detection Scanning Method Dehumidifier 6 Process System / Yield
Copy Function Description UF-9000 DP-180 / 190 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Remarks
Mechanical Indicator
Yes Yes (Optional) 6.61 lb (3 kg) Yes No No Specified Language No 600 dpi CCD No
Mechanical Counter
Toner Cartridge
UG-5530 / DQ-UG16H / UG17H [Yield: 5 K (5% coverage), 6 K Max] Average yield is based on 5% coverage of the printable area with repetitive printing of 10 pages (Letter/A4 size, single side printing, default density). The yield of a Toner Cartridge varies depending on the coverage, temperature, humidity, media, etc. Therefore, the average yield cannot be guaranteed. Continuously printing 10% coverage of printable area will reduce the yield of the Toner Cartridge to about half as compared to 5% coverage printing. The maximum yield of the Toner Cartridge will not exceed 6,000 pages by way of Digital Counter. UG-5540 [Yield: 10 K (3% coverage), 11.5 K Max] DQ-UG26H/UG27H [Yield: 6K (5% coverage), 11.5 K Max] The maximum yield of the Toner Cartridge will not exceed 11,500 pages by way of Digital Counter. (See sect.1.5.)
17
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
Items Efficiency 1 Productivity ADF Through-put Speed ADU Copy Productivity (LTR / A4) 12 10 copies PM Cycle 1 PM Cycle Major PM Minor PM (Cleaning) 2 Average Copy Volume 3 Max. Copy Volume Packing Configuration 1 Packing Dimension 2 Packing Weight 3 Accessories Process Unit Operating Instructions Power Supply 1 Power Requirement 2 Power Consumption Ambient Conditions 1 Temperature 2 Relative Humidity 3 Safety 4 Energy Saver 5 EMI 6 Lead Free Solder (PbF)
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Remarks
Approx. 50%
Throughput when the LSU is ready; Paper is fed from the 1st Paper Tray and is ejected to the Exit Tray.
85 K (Printer), 50K (ADF) 10 K (ADF) 1.5 K 10 K 24.3 x 29.3 x 26.4 in (616 x 745 x 670 mm) 63.9 lb (29 kg) Yes Yes 99 - 132 VAC 47 - 63 Hz Single phase 180 - 264 VAC 47 - 63 Hz Single phase Max. 900W 50 - 80 F / 10 - 30 C 30 - 80%RH UL60950-1 / CSA C22.2 No.60950-1 EN60950-1 Energy Star Compliant Class B computing device peripheral in FCC Rules Part 15 This Product uses Lead Free (PbF) PCBs
For USA and Canada For EU and Other Destinations For USA and Canada Refer to the inner Front Cover and the Parts Manual for details
18
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
1.3.
1.3.1.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Items Main Specifications 1 Compatibility 2 PSTN Line Port 3 Leased Line Port 4 V.24 Line Port 5 Modem Speed 6 Coding Scheme 7 ECM 8 Short Protocol
T.30/V.34/V.17/V.29/V.27ter Conforms to ITU-T Rec. T.30 ECM ITU-T Image No. 1 (A4, Std Resolution)
Yes (B, D) LTR : Approx. 2.7 sec 9 Transmission Speed A4 : Approx. 2.9 sec Transmission Std. : 203 x 98 (8 x 3.85) Fine : 203 x 196 (8 x 7.7) S-Fine : 203 x 391 (8 x 15.4) 406 x 391 (16 x 15.4) Communication Resolution 600dpi : 600 x 600 dpi 10 dpi x lpi (pels/mm x lines/ Reception mm) Std. : 203 x 98 (8 x 3.85) Fine : 203 x 196 (8 x 7.7) S-Fine : 203 x 391 (8 x 15.4) 406 x 391 (16 x 15.4) 600dpi : 600 x 600 dpi Scanner Mechanism 1 Scanning Device CCD (ADF / Platen) Scanning Resolution / 2 Speed Std: 203 x 98 (8 x 3.85) dpi x lpi (pels/mm x lines/ mm) Fine: 203 x 196 (8 x 7.7) dpi x lpi (pels/mm x lines/ LTR : 2.7 sec LTR : 2.7 sec mm) A4 : 2.9 sec S-Fine: 406 x 391 (16 x 15.4) dpi x lpi (pels/mm x lines/mm) 600dpi: 600 x 600 Legal 3 Document Size (Max.) 216 x 2000 mm 4 Effective Scanning Width 5 ADF Capacity LTR : 8.3 in (212 mm) A4 : 8.2 in (207 mm) 50 sheets
600 dpi communication is only possible between T.30 Compliant Panafax, WORKiO, and other T.30 compliant machines.
Excludes: Initializing Time, ADF slipping factor, and Data XMT Time. (Letter size for USA and Canada; A4 size for Other Destinations)
Using ADF only (Letter size for USA and Canada; A4 size for Other Destinations) Face Up, top feed LTR / A4 (20 lb / 75 g/m2)
19
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
Items 6 Collation Stack Printer Mechanism 1 Recording Method 2 Recording Speed 3 Recording Resolution Fax 4 Recording Paper Size 5 Effective Printing Width
UF-9000 DP-180/190
6 Recording Paper Capacity 7 Collation Stack 8 Consumable Fax Memory 1 Standard Memory 2 Optional Memory Dual Operation 1 Multi Task Operation 2 Direct XMT Reserve 3 Memory XMT Reserve Number of Memory Job 4 Files Dialing/Telephone Features 1 One-Touch Keys 2 One-Touch / Program Keys 3 One-Touch Auto Dialers 4 Abbr. Auto Dialers 5 Total Auto Dialers 6 Directory Search Dialing 7 Program Dials 8 Max. Tel Number Digits Max. Station Name 9 Characters Full Number Dialing 10 (Buffered Dialing) Direct Dialing 11 (Monitor Dialing)
600 x 600 dpi Legal / Letter Legal / Letter Invoice: Not supported. A4 / A5 LTR : 8.1 in LTR : 8.1 in (207mm) Letter : USA and Canada A4 : Other Destinations (207mm) A4 : 7.9 in (201 mm) Tray 1 + 2 : Max. 800 sheets 250 sheets LTR / A4: 20 lb (75 g/m2) Yes Face Down All in One Drum Unit Cartridge and Toner 2 MB 4 MB 8 MB Yes Yes Yes Yes 32 8 40 160 200 Yes 8 36 15 Yes Yes Max. 50 stations Voice mode Plus an additional 800 stations available to select from, when the optional Hard Disk Drive is installed. Max. 50 files Flash ROM, ITU-T Image No.1 (A4, Std Resolution) Expansion Flash Memory Card, using ITU-T Image No.1 (A4, Std Resolution)
20
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
Items 12 Automatic Redialing 13 Manual Redialing 14 Line Monitor Speaker 15 Chain Dialing (Hybrid Dial) 16 Pulse / Tone Dialing 17 Pulse to Tone Change 18 Flash Key 19 Handset Transmission Features 1 Direct Transmission 2 Memory Transmission Quick Memory 3 Transmission 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Multi-Station Transmission (Sequential Broadcasting) Direct Deferred Transmission Deferred Transmission Deferred Multi-Station Transmission Priority Direct Transmission Priority Memory Transmission Batch Transmission 90 Degree Rotation Transmission Cover Sheet Confidential Mail Box Multi-Copy Transmission
Fax Function Description UF-9000 DP-180 / 190 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Option Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Yes No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 21
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Remarks Up to 15 times at 0 to 15 min. intervals Pressing the REDIAL/PAUSE button In Monitor Dialing mode only 10 pps / DTMF
Page Retransmission Max. 250 stations (200 One-Touch / Abbr. + 50 Full Number Dialing) ADF Deferred Transmission Max. 50 timers
15 Memory Back-Up 16 Duplex Scanning Reception Features 1 Substitute Reception 2 Fixed Reduction 3 Auto Reduction 4 Overlap Printing 5 Receive to Memory
FAX: Back-up with Flash Memory. Copy / Printer: No Back-up with D-RAM
LTR/A4/LGL: 70 - 100% (in 1% Steps), Top & Left Alignment LTR/A4/LGL: 70 - 100% (in 1% Steps), Top & Left Alignment Page End Approx. 0.51 in (13 mm)
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
Items Distinctive Ring Detector (DRD) 90 Degree Rotation 7 Reception 8 Duplex Printing Polling 1 Polling 2 Turnaround Polling 3 Multi-Station Polling 4 Deferred Polling Deferred Multi-Station 5 Polling 6 Direct Polling Tx 7 Memory Polling Tx 8 Preset Polling Password Temporary Polling 9 Password 10 Continuous Polling Convenience 1 Panel Display 2 Voice Contact 3 Edit File Mode 4 Incomplete File Save 5 Automatic Cover Sheet Certainty 1 Verification Stamp 2 Header / Total Page Print 6 3 Transaction Journal 4 Comm. Journal 5 Last Ind. XMT Journal Printout Lists 1 One-Touch List 2 ABBR. No. List 3 Program List 4 Address Book Search List 5 Fax Parameter List 6 File List 7 Ind. XMT Journal 8 Directory Sheet Identifications 1 Logo 2 Multiple Logo 3 Character ID 4 Numeric ID
Fax Function Description UF-9000 DP-180 / 190 Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Max. 250 stations Max. 50 timers Max. 50 timers / 250 stations 1 File
22
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
Items Special Communications 1 Password XMT / RCV 2 Selective Reception 3 Relay XMT Request 4 Relay XMT Center 5 Confidential XMT / Polling 6 Confidential Center 7 Mailbox XMT / Polling 8 Mailbox Center 9 File XMT 10 Received Fax Forward 11 Sub-address XMT 12 Sub-address Auto Routing 13 NYSE 14 Internet Fax Relay XMT 15 Email Relay XMT 16 Panafax Desktop Standards 1 PSTN Others 1 Fax Access Code 2 PIN Code Access 3 Intelligent Redial (AI) 4 Department Code 5 Power Saver Mode 6 Self Diagnostic Function Remote Diagnostic 7 Function 8 Check & Call Function 9 V.24 / Encryption Interface
Fax Function Description UF-9000 DP-180 / 190 Yes Yes No No No No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes FCC Part 68 / Industry Canada No. CS-03: Issue 8 TBR21 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Remarks
TSI Check
Max.10 Mail Boxes Received File Transfer T. Routing For USA and Canada only iFAX iFAX G3FAX PC iFAX G3FAX
23
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
1.3.2.
Printer Function
Printer Function Description UF-9000 DP-180 / 190 No Yes Yes No LGL / LTR Yes No Max. 1200 (Interpolated) x 600 dpi USB / Ethernet Win 98 / Win Me / Win NT 4.0 / Win 2000 / Win XP / MAC 8.6-10.1 20 MB Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes IBM PC, AT or Compatible, MAC Yes Yes Yes Yes LGL / LTR / A4 / A5 / B5
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Items Interface 1 Centronics Parallel I/F 2 LAN (Network) 3 USB Port 4 IEEE-1394 Printer Function 1 Printing Size 2 Bypass 3 Stapling 4 Printing Resolution (dpi) 5 Interface 6 OS 7 Printer Work Memory Size 8 GDI 9 PDL (PCL6) 10 PDL (PS3) 11 Duplex Printing 12 Collation Stack 13 Status Monitor Network USB 14 Network Status Monitor 15 Smoothing 16 Applicable PC 17 Multi-Task Operation Printing while Fax-XMT from Memory Printing while Fax-RCV into Memory Fax-XMT from Memory while Printing Fax-RCV into Memory while Printing
Remarks
Selectable 600 dpi, with Smoothing, the results are similar to PS3 / PCL6 Printers (1200 dpi Interpolated). MAC 8.6-10.1 is PS only. Not expandable Requires Optional PS / PCL6 Emulation Kit and Optional Expansion Board. Requires Optional PS / PCL6 Emulation Kit and Optional Expansion Board. Custom Size/Postcard Size is not available.
MAC is PS only.
24
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Remarks
19 Font 20 Mailbox
21 Secure Mailbox
Yes
Requires Optional PCL6 or PS / PCL6 Emulation Kit Requires Optional HDD Unit. Max. 100 Users. Max. 20 mailboxes for each User ID Requires Optional HDD Unit. Max. 100 Users. Max. 20 mailboxes for each User ID
25
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
1.3.3.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Items Interface 1 Centronics Parallel I/F 2 LAN (Network) 3 USB Port 4 IEEE-1394 Network Scanning Function 1 Scanning Device 2 Scanning Speed (ADF) Mono Color 3 Halftone 4 Max. Document Size 5 Scanning Resolution (dpi) Mono Color 6 OS 7 2-Sided Scanning 8 File Format Mono Color 9 Completion Notice 10 Protocol Network Address Features 1 One Touch Address Keys 2 Abbr. Address Numbers
Remarks
600 dpi (Data XMT time is not included.) 300 dpi (Data XMT time is not included.) With Error Diffusion Using ADF only
600 x 600 300 x 300 150 x 150 300 x 300 150 x 150 75 x 75 Win 98 / Me / Win NT 4.0 / Win 2000 / XP No Multi-page TIFF / PDF JPEG / PDF Yes TCP/IP / Non-Std 40 60
Shared with Fax/I-Fax One-Touch Address, 40 in Total Independent for Network Scanner
26
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
1.3.4.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Items Main Specifications 1 Communication Protocols 2 Max. Modem Speed 3 Coding Scheme 4 File Format 5 Line Interface Scanner Mechanism 1 Max. Document Size 2 Effective Scanning Width
Remarks
Selectable (PDF & JPEG formats are used for Scan-to-Email, current I-Fax standards do not support these file formats) Ethernet LAN With the ADF only Letter size: for USA and Canada A4 size : for Other Destinations LAN: 600 dpi, 16 x 15.4 Scanning Resolution is available.
Printer Mechanism 1 Printing Resolution 2 Effective Recording Width Transmission Features 1 Multi-Task Operation 2 Memory Transmission Sequential Multi-Station 3 Transmission 4 Simultaneous Multi-Station Transmission LTR A4
5 Sender Selection G3 / Email Mixed 6 Broadcasting 7 Deferred Transmission 8 Fax Forward 9 Sub-address RCV 10 Mail Header Email Header Print Selection Subject Line
27
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
Items LAN Features 1 Internet Fax Communication 2 Internet Mail Reception 3 Internet Fax Server Features Internet Fax Relay XMT Email Relay XMT Received Fax / Email Forward PC FAX Transmission Inbound Routing Phone Book Registration from PC I-Fax Parameters Registration via Email Internet Delivery Confirmation Network Scanning Network Printing LPR / LPD GDI PDL 8 DHCP Client 9 LDAP 10 TIFF Viewer 11 NYSE Certainty 1 Comm. Journal (w / Image) ID 1 Email Address
Internet Fax Function Description UF-9000 / DP-180/190 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes With MDN 600 dpi
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Remarks
iFAX iFAX G3FAX PC iFAX G3FAX Local print available Panafax Desktop Only (Network) Using Sub-Address. Local print available Via Email or Network Address Editor
4 5 6 7
600 dpi 600 dpi Requires Optional PS / PCL6 Emulation Kit and Optional Expansion Board. Lightweight Directory Access Protocol Selectable, PDMS / TIFF Viewer For USA and Canada only
28
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
1.4.
System Combination
UF-9000 DP-180/190
(PNL PC Board)
Panel
Main PC Board
PCL6 Emulation Option PS/PCL6 Emulation Option Hard Disk Drive Option
29
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
1.5.
Options
Options List
Option Name Option Number DA-PC188 DA-PC190 DA-MC188 DA-MC190 DA-HD19 Remarks
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Printer Controller Module (PCL6*) Multi Page Description Language Controller Module (PCL6/PostScript 3*)
Expansion Board Expansion Flash Memory Card, 4 MB Expansion Flash Memory Card, 8 MB Image Memory (16 MB) Image Memory (64 MB) Image Memory (128 MB) Accounting Software 2nd Paper Feed Module Handset Kit Deluxe Stand Mechanical Counter
DA-EM600 UE-410047 UE-410048 DA-SM16B DA-SM64B DA-SM28B DA-WA10 DA-DS188 UE-403171 UE-403172 DA1D190 DZTQ000066
For DP-180/190 For UF-9000 For DP-180/190 For UF-9000 Additional Optional Sorting Image Memory (Minimum 16 MB) is required for the Hard Disk Drive to function. (PS additional fonts, Mail Box, additional 800 addresses, etc.) F-ROM Board (8 MB) is required for PCL or PS printing. Additional Memory for Fax / I-Fax For Electronic Sorting For Accounting Function For USA and Canada For Other Destinations Available in Specified Destinations For USA and Canada only Supplied as a Service Part.
Note: PCL6 is a Page Description Language of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PostScript 3 (PS3) is a Page Description Language of the Adobe Systems Company. The Part Name(s) / Part Number(s) differ depending on the Models and the Destinations.
30
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
Supplies
UF-9000 DP-180/190
UF-9000
Part Name Toner Cartridge (All in One Cartridge) UG-5540* Part Number UG-5530 Color of Control Panel Current Light Blue Current Light Blue Navy Blue Control Panel Remarks 5K (5% coverage), 6K Max 5K (5% coverage), 6K Max 10K (3% coverage), 11.5K Max
Note: 1. UG-5530 cannot be used with the New Navy Blue Control Panel models, Serial No. prefix CF [March 2006] and above for USA/Canada. 2. The UG-5540 can be used with the current Light Blue Control Panel models, Serial No. prefix BF [February 2006] and below for USA/Canada however, the yield will be the same as for the UG-5530 (6K Max). .
DP-190
Part Number DQ-UG17H DQ-UG27H* DQ-UH35H Part Number DQ-UG16H DQ-UG26H* DQ-UH34H
Color of Control Panel Current Light Blue Current Light Blue Navy Blue Control Panel Color of Control Panel Current Light Blue Current Light Blue Navy Blue Control Panel -
Remarks 5K (5% coverage), 6K Max 5K (5% coverage), 6K Max 6K (5% coverage), 11.5K Max
DP-180
Part Name Toner Drum Unit Remarks 5K (5% coverage), 6K Max 5K (5% coverage), 6K Max 6K (5% coverage), 11.5K Max
Note: 1. DQ-UG16H / 17H cannot be used with the New Navy Blue Control Panel models, Serial No. prefix CF [March 2006] and above for USA/Canada (may differ for other destinations). 2. The DQ-UG26H / 27H can be used with the current Light Blue Control Panel models, Serial No. prefix BF [February 2006] and below for USA/Canada (may differ for other destinations), however, the yield will be the same as the DQ-UG16H / 17H (6K Max). New Navy Blue Color Light Blue Color
31
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
1.6.
1. Standard Configuration
(For USA Only)
Complies with FDA radiation performance standards, 21 CFR Subchapter J
External View
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Top View
18.19 in (462 mm) 19.89 in (505 mm)
Left View
Front View
Right View
Rear View
CAUTION
PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM BATTERY. REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE. "IMPROPER USE OR REPLACEMENT MAY CAUSE OVERHEATING, RUPTURE OR EXPLOSION RESULTING IN INJURY OR FIRE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS OF YOUR LOCAL SOLID WASTE OFFICIALS AND LOCAL REGULATIONS"
Denotes hazards that could result in minor injury or damage to the machine.
* THIS
Note: The service life of the Battery is approximately 1 year under normal use.
32
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
33
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
3. Space Requirements
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Main Unit
3.94 in (100 mm)
18.19 in (462 mm) 3.94 in (100 mm) 3.94 in (100 mm) 14.57 in (370 mm) 3.94 in (100 mm) 26.06 in (662 mm) 3.94 in (100 mm) 18.19 in (462 mm) 3.94 in (100 mm) 14.57 in (370 mm) 3.94 in (100 mm) 30.39 in (772 mm)
34
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
1.6.1.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Sequential Production Number 5-Digit Sequential Production Number 00001 ~ 99999 = 1 ~ 99,999 units A0001 ~ Y9999 = 100,000 ~ 329,976 units (Letters I and O are skipped)
Model Number and Destination Code (Main Unit) 3-Digit number or alphanumeric representation (Except Letters I and O) For Example: 3QY = UF-9000-AU 3RA = DP-180-PB
3QZ = DP-190-PU
Production Facility
Production Year Starting with Year 2001, the last 2-digits of the year is represented as: A ~ T A B C D E F G H I J : : : : : : : : : : 01 (2001) 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 (2010) K L M N O P Q R S T : : : : : : : : : : 11 (2011) 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 (2020)
Production Month A B C D E F : : : : : : January February March April May June G H I J K L : : : : : : July August September October November December
35
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
1.7.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
OPC Drum Unit Interlock Switch Scanner Motor Front Cover Safety Interlock Switch Motor Fan Main Switch 2nd Paper Feed Motor Registration Solenoid Clutch Main Motor
Pick Up Solenoid
1.8.
Document Sensor Read Point Sensor Home Detect Sensor PNL5 PCB
36
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
2 Disassembly Instructions
2.1.
Pertinent Disassembly Instruction sections are shown below.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
General Disassembly
37
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
2.2.
2.2.1. 2.2.1.1.
Disassembly Instructions
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Unit Stamp Head (553)
UF-9000 DP-180/190
(1) Open the ADF. (2) Detach the left side of the Scanning Pad (404). (3) Open the Stamp Cover.
Note: When closing the Stamp Cover, close gently by pressing both latches.
2.2.1.2.
38
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
(3) Remove 2 Snap Rivets (551). (4) Remove the Separator Assembly.
(5) Remove the Separation Rubber (547). Note: When reinstalling, ensure that the embossed "R" is facing downward.
(6) Remove 2 Silver Screws (V7). (7) Close the ADF Cover.
39
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
(9) Remove the Tension Spring (426). (10) Remove 1 Screw (V7). (11) Remove the ADF Roller Fix Plate (409).
(12) Lift the ADF Cover Base. (13) Remove the ADF Roller Assembly as illustrated.
Note: When reinstalling, ensure that the ADF Roller Assembly is connected with 2 Document Stoppers correctly. (ex. When the Pick Up Roller goes down, 2 Document Stoppers rise up.)
(14) Remove the ADF Shaft (418). (15) Remove the ADF Roller (417).
40
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
(16) Remove the Stopper Arm (413). (17) Remove 2 E-Ring (447). (18) Remove the Pick Up Shaft (415). (19) Remove the Pick Up Roller (414).
41
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
2.2.1.3.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
(6) Disconnect all the Harnesses on ADF PC Board. (7) Remove 2 Screws (V7) and 1 Screw (V9). (8) Remove the ADF PC Board (1911).
42
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
(9) Remove the Paper Transport Knob (525). (10) Remove 2 Screws (H8). (11) Remove the Document Guide (429).
(12) Remove the ADF Cover. (Refer to 2.2.1.2.) (13) Remove 2 Silver Screws (V7).
(14) Release the Ferrite Core from the Latch Hook. (15) Remove 2 Screws (V9). (16) Remove the ADF Motor (541).
43
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
2.2.1.4.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
(1) Remove the Document Guide. (Refer to 2.2.1.3.) (2) Remove the ADF Cover. (Refer to 2.2.1.2.) (3) Remove 2 Silver Screws (V7). (4) Remove the front Pin (425). (5) Remove the rear Pin (425).
(6) Remove the Upper ADF Feed Unit. (7) Remove the Wire Clamp. (8) Remove 3 Screws (V9). (9) Remove the Motor Attachment Plate. (10) Disconnect the Harness on the ADF PC Board (PA05). (11) Remove the ADF Feed Unit.
(13) Remove 2 Silver Screws (V7). (14) Remove the Rear Attachment Plate.
44
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
(15) Remove 2 Silver Screws (V7). (16) Remove the Front Attachment Plate.
(17) Remove 2 Silver Screws (V7). (18) Remove the Frame Cover.
(19) Remove 2 D6 Bushings (537). (20) Remove the Feed Roller (516).
2.2.1.5.
Cleaning ADF Roller, Pick Up Roller, Separation Rubber and Feed Roller
(1) Open the ADF Cover. (2) Clean the ADF Roller (417), Pick Up Roller (414) and Separation Rubber (547) with a soft cloth, saturated with water. Note: For stubborn toner accumulation, wipe with a soft cloth saturated with Isopropyl Alcohol first, then follow up with a soft cloth saturated with water.
45
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
(3) Clean the Feed Roller (516) with a soft cloth, saturated with water by turning Paper Transport Knob. Note: For stubborn toner accumulation, wipe with a soft cloth saturated with Isopropyl Alcohol first, then follow up with a soft cloth saturated with water.
46
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
2.2.2. 2.2.2.1.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Battery (128), PNL1 PC Board (1905), PNL2 PC Board (1906), PNL3 PC Board (1907), PNL5 PC Board (1909), PNL4 PC Board (1908), LCD Module (127)
<Replace the Battery> (1) Remove 1 Screw (V6). (2) Remove the Battery Holder (102).
(3) Replace the Battery (128). Note: Ensure that the battery is installed with correct polarity. (4) Reinstall the Battery Holder (102) and the Screw (V6).
<Control Panel> (5) Remove 2 Screws (V7). (6) Remove the Control Panel Unit.
47
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
(8) Disconnect all the Harnesses on PNL1 PC Board as illustrated. (9) Remove 2 Screws (F10). (10) Remove the PNL1 PC Board (1905).
(13) Remove 13 Screws (F10). (14) Remove the PNL 2 PC Board (1906).
48
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
(16) Remove 7 Screws (F10). (17) Remove the PNL 3 PC Board (1907).
(18) Remove 4 Screws (F10). (19) Remove the PNL 5 PC Board (1909).
49
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
50
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
2.2.3. 2.2.3.1.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
(1) Remove the ADF Rear Cover. (Refer to 2.2.1.3.) (2) Remove 1 Screw (V9). (3) Disconnect the Harness on the ADF PC Board (PA04).
(4) Open the ADF. (5) Release the Latch of the Left Hinge with a small Straight Edge Screwdriver and remove the ADF.
(6) Remove the Control Panel Unit. (Refer to 2.2.2.1.) (7) Remove 8 Screws (V7). (8) Remove the Wire Clamp. (9) Remove the Scanner Cover Assembly (219).
(10) Disconnect the Harness. (11) Remove 2 Screws (W8). (12) Remove the Scanning Lamp (303). (13) Slide the CCD Unit. Note: The FG Harness is used on the UF-9000/DP-190 only.
51
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
(14) Remove the CCD Harness Seal (213). (15) Remove 2 Screws (H8). (16) Remove the Seal Plate (227). (17) Disconnect the Flat Harness (1922). Note: There is no need to disconnect the front FG Harness that is attached to the CCD Unit. Note: The FG Harness is used on the UF-9000/DP-190 only. (18) Remove 3 Screws (V7) and 2 Screws (H8). (19) Remove the Main Board Cover (216).
(20) Disconnect all the Harnesses. (21) Remove 4 Screws (H8). (22) Remove SPC PC Board (1910).
52
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
2.2.4. 2.2.4.1.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
(1) Open the Front Cover. (2) Release 2 Latch Hooks and remove the Front Cover (601).
(3) Open the Rear Door. (4) Release 2 Latch Hooks and remove the Rear Door (612).
2.2.4.2.
(2) Remove 5 Silver Screws (V6). (3) Remove the Right Side Cover.
53
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
(4) Disconnect the Speaker Harness (631). (5) Release the Harness from the Harness Clamp.
(6) Remove 5 Silver Screws (V6). (7) Remove the Left Side Cover (616).
(8) Remove 2 Silver Screws (V6). (9) Remove the Rear Cover (617).
54
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
2.2.5. 2.2.5.1.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
(1) Remove the Right Cover. (Refer to 2.2.4.2.) (2) Remove 7 Screws (U1). (3) Remove the SC Cover (701). (4) Remove 2 Screws (U1). (5) Remove the PCB Cover (620).
(6) Remove 1 Screw (U1). (7) Remove the Spring Plate (705).
(8) Unlock the Harness Clamp fastening the USB Cable. (9) Disconnect the USB Cable (1923) on the SC PC Board (CN305). (10) Release the USB Cable from the Harness Clamp.
(11) Disconnect all the Harnesses on the SC PC Board. (12) Remove 7 Screws (U1). (13) Remove the SC PC Board (1901).
55
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
(14) Disconnect all the Harnesses on the FXB PC Board. (15) Remove 4 Screws (U1). (16) Remove the FXB PC Board (1903).
(17) Release the Harnesses from the Harness Clamp. (18) Remove 4 Screws (U1) and 1 Screw (T9). (19) Remove the SC Base Bracket (702).
(20) Disconnect all the Harnesses on the Engine Control PC Board. (21) Remove 4 Screws (U1). (22) Remove the Engine Control PC Board (1902).
2.2.5.2.
56
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
(4) Remove 2 Screws (T9) and 1 Screw (U3). (5) Disconnect the Flat Harness (1917). (6) Release the Latch Hook and remove the HVPS (1005).
(8) Disconnect 2 Harnesses (1219 and 1930) on the LVPS Unit. (9) Remove 2 Screws (T9) and 1 Screw (U1). (10) Remove the LVPS Unit.
57
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
2.2.6.
Drive Unit
UF-9000 DP-180/190
(1) Remove the SC Base Bracket. (Refer to 2.2.5.1.) (2) Disconnect the Harnesses on the Engine Control PC Board (CN004, CN011, CN012, CN016 and CN019). (3) Release the Harnesses from the Harness Clamps.
(4) Remove 4 Screws (U1) and 1 Screw (T9). (5) Remove the Solenoid Assembly.
(6) Remove 6 Screws (T9). (7) Disconnect the Harness. (8) Remove the Drive Assembly.
(9) Remove 4 Screws (U1). (10) Disconnect the Harness. (11) Remove the Motor (907).
58
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
2.2.7.
LSU Unit
UF-9000 DP-180/190
(1) Remove the Front Cover. (Refer to 2.2.4.1.) (2) Remove the Right Cover, Left Cover and Rear Cover. (Refer to 2.2.4.2.) (3) Remove the SC Cover and disconnect the USB Cable. (Refer to 2.2.5.1.) (4) Release 2 Harnesses from 2 Harness Clamps. (5) Disconnect 2 Harnesses on the SC PC Board (CN304 and CN306).
(8) Remove 3 Screws (V9). (9) Remove the Top Cover (623).
(10) Disconnect 2 Harnesses. (11) Remove 3 Screws (U3). (12) Remove the LSU Unit (1114).
59
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
2.2.8.
Fuser Unit
UF-9000 DP-180/190
CAUTION: To prevent from getting burned, do not install, remove, clean or make adjustments when the Fuser Unit is hot. (1) Remove the Rear Door. (Refer to 2.2.4.1.) (2) Remove the Scanner Unit and Upper Cover. (Refer to 2.2.7.) (3) Disconnect 2 Harnesses by pressing down on the connector latches with a small screw driver.
(4) Remove 4 Screws (T9). (5) Remove the Upper Exit Roller Holder (1101).
(6) Disconnect the Harness (1219) on the LVPS Unit. (7) Remove the Ferrite Core (1115).
(8) Remove 4 Screws (U4) and 1 Screw (U1). (9) Remove the Fuser Unit.
60
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
(10) Remove 2 Screws (T9). (11) Remove the Side Fuser Cover (1226). (12) Remove 2 Screws (T9). (13) Remove the Left Fuser Cover (1224).
(14) Remove 2 Black Screws (U5). (15) Separate the Upper Fuser Unit.
(17) Remove 2 Screws (V1). Caution: Exercise caution not to bend the Fuser Lamp Terminal. (18) Remove the Halogen Lamp (1209). Note: Do not Touch the glass portion of the Fuser Lamp with bare hands. Grease from finger prints will shorten its life cycle, use isopropyl alcohol to clean finger prints.
61
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
(19) Shift the Fuser Roller and remove the Left Heat Roller Bushing (1206). (20) Remove the Heat Roller (1205). (21) Remove the Heat Roller Gear (1208) and the Right Heat Roller Bushing (1207).
(24) Remove 1 Screw (U4). (25) Remove the Thermistor Assembly (1229).
(26) Remove 4 Springs (1223). (27) Remove 4 Screws (T9). (28) Remove 4 Separator Plates (1222). (29) Remove 4 Separators (1225).
62
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
2.2.9. 2.2.9.1.
Paper Feed Module Pick Up Roller (1316) and Separator Pad (1615)
(1) Pull the Paper Tray out.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
(3) Remove the Front Cover. (Refer to 2.2.4.1.) (4) Remove the Pick Up Roller Assembly.
2.2.9.2.
63
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
(1) Remove the Front Cover. (Refer to 2.2.4.1.) (2) Remove the Cartridge Unit. (3) Remove 2 Transfer Roller Holder (1501).
(5) Remove the Spacer (811). (6) Remove the Transfer Gear (1505). (7) Remove 2 Bushings (1504). (8) Remove 2 Spacer (811).
64
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
2.2.11.
ADU
UF-9000 DP-180/190
(1) Remove the Scanner Unit. (Refer to 2.2.7.) (2) Slide the Paper Tray out. (3) Turn the Unit upside down. (4) Remove 4 Screws (T9). (5) Remove the Lower Base Plate (1401).
(6) Remove 2 Screws (U1). (7) Remove the Plate. (8) Remove 4 Screws (T9). (9) Remove the ADU Unit.
(10) Remove the E-Ring (U6). (11) Remove the A/D Unit Join Gear (1411). (12) Remove the ADU Registration Roller shaft (1409).
(13) Disconnect the Harness on the Registration / Paper Path Sensor PC Board. (14) Remove 1 Screw (T9). (15) Release the Latch Hook and remove the Registration / Paper Detect Sensor PC Board (1938).
65
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
2.2.12. 2nd Paper Feed Module 2.2.12.1. Pick Up Roller (1733), Separator Pad (1812), 2nd Feeder PC Board (1945)
UF-9000 DP-180/190
(1) Separate the 2nd Paper Feed Module from the Unit. (2) Remove 2 Screws (U1). (3) Remove the Top Cover Assembly (1730).
(4) Remove 4 Screws (U1). (5) Release 2 Latch Hooks and remove the Right Cover.
(6) Remove the Spacer (811). (7) Remove the Clutch (1734).
(8) Remove 2 Screws (U1). (9) Remove the 2nd Feeder PC Board (1945).
66
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
(10) Remove the Spacer (811). (11) Remove the Bearing (1715). (12) Shift the Shaft and remove the Pick Up Roller (1733).
(13) Remove the Paper Tray. (14) Remove the Separator Pad (1824).
67
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
2.2.13.1. Cleaning Paper Feed Roller (1305), Registration Roller (1303), Paper Chute and Dust Scraper Assembly (1315)
(1) Open the Front Cover.
(3) Wipe the Paper Feed Roller (A: 1305), Registration Roller (B: 1303) and Paper Chute (C) with a soft cloth that has been moistened with water. Note: 1. Ensure to clean up all the paper dust. 2. Paper Feed Roller (A) can be rotated half way, Registration Roller (B) can be rotated in the direction of the arrow. Exercise care not to damage the Sheets (D) in front of the Registration Roller (B). (4) Open the Dust Scraper Assembly Cover (1315). (5) Clean the inside with the vacuum cleaner. (6) Close the Dust Scraper Assembly Cover. Note: Ensure that the cover is firmly closed as it may damage the OPC Drum.
68
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
2.3.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Figure
XTB3+8G XWC3BFJ
XWC3B
XTW3+6LFJ
XTW3+6L
Screw
Screw (See Note)
69
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Figure
XTW3+6S XWE4 XTW3+6LFC XTB3+8JFN XTW3+8PFN XTW4+16PFN XTW3+6LFN XTS3+8J DZZSP29011 XTB2+12J XSN2+10FN PJNAC0003Z XTN3+8JFN XTW4+8LFN
Screw Washer Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw
70
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
71
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Laser Handling Precautions The optical laser system employed by this photocopier is completely sealed by a protective housing and an external cover. Therefore, the laser beam will not stray or leak during photocopying operation. However, when servicing the photocopier, take the following precautions: 1. Do not insert any screwdrivers or other tools that have high reflective properties into the laser's path. 2. . Before servicing the machine, remove watches, rings, or other metallic objects that you may be wearing. (This is to avoid the danger of the laser striking the eye by reflecting off the metallic objects being worn.) Since the laser beam cannot be seen with the naked eye, for maximum safety, please follow the above precautions.
72
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
3.2.
Required Tools
UF-9000 DP-180/190
No. Tools 1 Soft Cloth 2 Isopropyl Alcohol 3 Phillips Screwdriver (#2) 4 5 6 Stubby Phillips Screwdriver (#2) Slotted Screwdriver (3/32 in) Tweezer
No. Tools 7 Pliers 8 Cotton Swab 9 Brush KS-660 - Conductive Grease 10 (Available from Shin-Etsu Silicones of America, Inc. URL: http://www.shinetsusilicones.com) Molykote EM-50L Grease 11 (Available from Dow Corning, URL: http://www.dowcorning.com)
3.2.1.
No. 1 2
3 4 5 6 7 8
Check & Clean Check & Clean Check & Clean Check
Gears, Rollers Shafts Check & Grease Timing Belts Check & Clean
73
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
3.3.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
74
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
The chart outlined below is a general guideline for maintenance. The list is for an average usage of 50 transmitted and received documents per day. Needless to say, the environmental conditions and actual use will vary these factors. The chart below is for reference only. Preventive Maintenance Parts Ref. No. 547 414 417 516 1316 1625 1503 1733 1824 1117 Cleaning Cycle Method (Sheet) 10K 10K 10K 10K 10K 10K 10K 10K 10K Wet soft cloth Wet soft cloth Wet soft cloth Wet soft cloth Wet soft cloth Wet soft cloth Dry soft cloth Wet soft cloth Wet soft cloth Replacement/Adjustment Cycle Procedure (Sheet) 50K 100K 100K 100K 85K 85K 85K 85K 85K 85K Ref. Counter
3.4.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
No.
ADF Unit 1 Separation Rubber 2 Pick Up Roller 3 ADF Roller 4 Feed Roller Paper Feed Module 5 Pick Up Roller 6 Separator Pad Bias Transfer Roller 7 (BTR) 2nd Paper Feed Module 8 Pick Up Roller 9 Separator Pad Fuser Unit 10 Fuser Unit
Refer to 2.2.1.
F7-08
F7-12
F7-13
F7-02
Note: 1. Wet Cloth represents a soft cloth saturated with water. For stubborn toner accumulation, wipe with a soft cloth saturated with Isopropyl Alcohol first, then follow up with a soft cloth saturated with water. 2. The Maintenance Cycle is based on the Counter Information for each individual module. To verify the counter information, print the Total Counter List using the Service Mode: F7 - Electronic Counter - 00 (List Print). 3. Cleaning, Replacement and Adjustment Cycle (Sheet) are based on using Panasonic's recommended standard paper and supplies. These cycles may vary with the kind of paper used, Paper size, orientation, print duty, continuous/interval print and/or ambient conditions. Total Counter View Mode on the LCD The Total Counter can be displayed on the Panel Display by pressing "COPY SIZE" and "PAPER TRAY" keys simultaneously in Standby mode for quick reference.
75
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
3.5.
The Quickest and Most Easiest Method of Updating the Firmware is to use the Network Firmware Program Tool (FUP) using Ethernet LAN Port and a Crossover Cable. The Network FUP Tool version must be 3.XX or higher, and it can be found on the Panasonic Document Management System CD-ROM included with the main unit or on the CD-ROM included with the PCL or PS/PCL options. Refer to the Firmware Update Operation Instructions, Service Notes (8.1.) for additional details.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
3.5.1.
A. Hardware Configuration This machine is controlled by two (2) CPUs which are located on the System Control (SC) PC Board and the Scanner Control (Scanner).
Firmware Configuration
SC PC Board
PC Ethernet Port PC USB Port Slot 1 (CN327) CPU On Board F-ROM 4 MB
Font 4 MB
(b)
Font 4 MB
(b)
SPC PC Board F-ROM 2 MB Scanner Control Program Panel Control Program (Display & Key In) Bitmap Data Font Data
CPU
B. SC PC Board Firmware The 4 MB Program Memory (F-ROM) is integrated on the SC PCB. An Optional Expansion 8 MB Program Memory (FRM8 PCB) can be installed into SLOT 1. The Firmware to be written into the 4 MB onboard and the 8 MB of SLOT 1 depends upon the configuration of the Standard, PCL or PS Options. (1) Standard The Standard Program (1) is only written into the 4 MB onboard, which is assigned as ROM Code (A). (2) For PCL Option The PCL Control Program (2) must be written into the 4 MB onboard, which is assigned as ROM Code (B). The PCL Control Program (3) and PCL Font data (4) are written into the 8 MB in the SLOT 1. The Firmware (3) and (4) are assigned as ROM Code (C). When using 8 MB Flash Memory Card, the 8 MB Program (C) can be written onto one card. When using 4 MB Flash Memory Card, the 8 MB program (C) must be divided onto 2 cards, one 4 MB card for the PCL Control Program (3) and one 4 MB card for the PCL Font data (4). (3) For PS Option The PS Control Program must be written into the 4 MB onboard, which is assigned as ROM Code (D). The PS Control Program (6) and (7) are written into the 8 MB in the SLOT 1. Both Firmwares (6) and (7) are assigned as ROM Code (E). When using 4 MB Flash Memory Card, the 8 MB program (E) must be divided onto 2 cards, one 4 MB card for the PS Control Program (6) and one 4 MB card for the PS Control Program (7). 76
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
C. SPC PC Board Firmware The 2 MB Program Memory (F-ROM) is integrated on the SPC PCB. The Programs for Scanner Control and Printer Control are saved on the Board. The Firmware is transferred as Serial Data from the SC PCB. D. Firmware Updating Ports Three (3) types of Ports are available for updating the firmware. (1) Ethernet LAN Port (The Quickest and Most Easiest Method) The machine's Firmware can be updated from a PC via Local Area Network (LAN). Refer to the Firmware Update Operation Instructions, Service Notes (8.1.) for additional details. (2) USB Port (Alternate) The machine's Firmware can be updated from a PC via USB Port. The Master Firmware Card can also be created from a PC using the USB Port. Refer to the Firmware Update Operation Instructions, Service Notes (8.1.) for additional details. (3) Flash Memory Card (Alternate) The machine's Firmware can be updated using the Master Firmware Card. The Master Firmware Card can be created by copying the Firmware from an existing machine's SC PCB using a 4 MB or 8 MB Flash Memory Card. To update the SC, SPC and PNL PCB, 3 Flash Memory Cards are required for the Standard configuration or 5 Flash Memory Cards for the PCL or PS/PCL configuration.
3.5.2.
The firmware code can be easily updated when the main unit is connected to a LAN. The Network Firmware Update Tool can also be used by connecting to the machine using a crossover cable, if the unit is not connected to a LAN. 1) Install the Network Firmware Update Tool to your PC The option CD-ROM includes the Network Firmware Update Tool and the Main Unit Firmware Code. Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Network Firmware Update Tool. The installation password is "workio". Operating Instructions: \xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\NwFirmup OI.pdf (Refer to the NW Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD) Setup: \xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\Setup\Setup.exe 2) Preparing the Firmware Code Double click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File and copy the Firmware Code File on the CD-ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked. Example: From: Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.bat [Navy Blue Control Panel] Firmware Code File: UF-9000_AUR_xxxxxxxx.exe or DP-190_180_AUR_xxxxxxxx.exe [Light Blue Control Panel] Firmware Code File: To: Firmware Data Folder: UF-9000_AU_xxxxxxxx.exe or DP-190_180_AU_xxxxxxxx.exe C:\ Panasonic \ Panasonic-FUP \ Data
Updating through a LAN Port (The Quickest and Most Easiest Method)
77
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware Upgrade Make sure the unit's Key Operator Password is the same as the tool's password. Make sure the unit is in an idle state (e.g. not making copies, not printing, etc.).
UF-9000 DP-180/190
4) Upgrading the Main Unit's Firmware Code Start the Network Firmware Update Tool and select the following Firmware Code Folders in the C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder, and then follow the display instructions to upgrade the Main Unit's Firmware Codes. The Firmware in the table below are not interchangeable. Firmware for machines with Serial No. prefix CF [March 2006], and above for USA/Canada (may differ for other destinations). (Navy Blue Control Panel), cannot be used on machines with Serial No. prefix BF [February 2006] and below for USA/Canada (may differ for other destinations). (Light Blue Control Panel).
Parent Firmware File Folder \ UF-9000_AUR_xxxxxx (Navy Blue Control Panel) Sub Firmware File Folder \ SC_STD \ DX-TrirAxVxxxxx_xx \ SC_PCL \ DX-TrirBxVxxxxx_xx \ SC_PS \ DX-TrirDxVxxxxx_xx \ SPC \ DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxx \ SC_STD \ DX-TriAxVxxxxx_xx \ SC_PCL \ DX-TriBxVxxxxx_xx \ SC_PS \ DX-TriDxVxxxxx_xx \ SPC \ DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxx \ SC_STD \ DP-TrirAxVxxxxx_xx \ SC_PCL \ DP-TrirBxVxxxxx_xx \ SC_PS \ DP-TrirDxVxxxxx_xx \ SPC \ DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxx \ SC_STD \ DP-TriAxVxxxxx_xx \ SC_PCL \ DP-TriBxVxxxxx_xx \ SC_PS \ DP-TriDxVxxxxx_xx \ SPC \ DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxx User Authentication X X X Transferring Order 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2
X X X
When you select the Parent Folder, the following Firmware Type window appears. Proper Sub File Folders are selected automatically by selecting the Firmware Type. The transferring order is set up automatically.
Note: 1. Manual mode must be used, when updating the designated version of the firmware or changing the type of the firmware. Please refer to the Section 2.2, "Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool, File Selection Tab" of the Operating Instructions. 2. While updating the firmware code, the display may become garbled, however, it will return to normal upon completion of the firmware update. 3. If the firmware update fails and the unit does not boot up, the Network Firmware Update Tool will not be able to transfer the firmware code. If this occurs, please refer to the next section "Updating through the USB Port" and use the Local Firmware Update Tool to recover the unit. 4. The suffix "_xx" for the Folder Name, or File Name may not exist depending on the destination location.
78
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
3.5.3.
If the device is not connected to the LAN, upgrade the firmware code using the USB Port. 1) Install the Local Firmware Update Tool to your PC The option CD-ROM includes the Local Firmware Update Tool, and the Main Unit Firmware Code. Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Local Firmware Update Tool. Operating Instructions: \xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\FIRMUP OI.pdf (Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD) Setup: \xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\Setup\Setup.exe 2. Preparing the Firmware Code Double click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File and copy the Firmware Code File on the CD-ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked. Example: From: Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.bat [Navy Blue Control Panel] Firmware Code File: UF-9000_AUR_xxxxxxxx.exe or DP-190_180_AUR_xxxxxxxx.exe [Light Blue Control Panel] Firmware Code File: To: Firmware Data Folder: UF-9000_AU_xxxxxxxx.exe or DP-190_180_AU_xxxxxxxx.exe C:\ Panasonic \ Panasonic-FUP \ Data
UF-9000 DP-180/190
3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware Upgrade Important: DO NOT connect the USB Cable yet. Enter into Test Mode F9-07-01 to enable the unit to accept the programming code from the USB Port. Now connect the USB Cable between the Unit and PC. Repeat the above steps if there are additional firmware code files to be updated. 4) Upgrading the Main Unit's Firmware Code Start the Local Firmware Update Tool, and select the following Firmware Code Parent File Folder in the C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder, and select the Firmware Code Type then follow the display instructions to upgrade the Main Unit's Firmware Codes. You must process each firmware file separately in this manner, and sequence.
79
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
The Firmware in the table below are not interchangeable. Firmware for machines with Serial No. prefix CF [March 2006], and above for USA/Canada (may differ for other destinations). (Navy Blue Control Panel), cannot be used on machines with Serial No. prefix BF [February 2006] and below for USA/Canada (may differ for other destinations). (Light Blue Control Panel).
Parent Firmware File Folder \ UF-9000_AUR_xxxxxx (Navy Blue Control Panel) Sub Firmware File Folder \ SC_STD \ DX-TrirAxVxxxxx_xx \ SC_PCL \ DX-TrirBxVxxxxx_xx Firmware File
UF-9000 DP-180/190
\ SC_PS \ DX-TrirDxVxxxxx_xx
\ SC_PS \ DX-TriDxVxxxxx_xx
\ SC_PS \ DP-TrirDxVxxxxx_xx
\ SC_PS \ DP-TriDxVxxxxx_xx
\ SPC \ DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxx
Transferring Order DX-TrirAxVxxxxx-xx.bin 1 DX-TrirBxVxxxxx_xx.bin 1-1 DX-TrirCxVxxxxxa_xx.bin 1-2 DX-TrirCxVxxxxxb.bin 1-3 DX-TrirDxVxxxxx_xx.bin 1-1 DX-TrirExVxxxxxa_xx.bin 1-2 DX-TrirExVxxxxxb.bin 1-3 DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxxx.bin 2 DX-TriAxVxxxxx-xx.bin 1 DX-TriBxVxxxxx_xx.bin 1-1 DX-TriCxVxxxxxa_xx.bin 1-2 DX-TriCxVxxxxxb.bin 1-3 DX-TriDxVxxxxx_xx.bin 1-1 DX-TriExVxxxxxa_xx.bin 1-2 DX-TriExVxxxxxb.bin 1-3 DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxxx.bin 2 DP-TrirAxVxxxxx-xx.bin 1 DP-TrirBxVxxxxx_xx.bin 1-1 DP-TrirCxVxxxxxa_xx.bin 1-2 DP-TrirCxVxxxxxb.bin 1-3 DP-TrirDxVxxxxx_xx.bin 1-1 DP-TrirExVxxxxxa_xx.bin 1-2 DP-TrirExVxxxxxb.bin 1-3 DP-180_190SPCAxVxxxxxx.bin 2 DP-TriAxVxxxxx-xx.bin 1 DP-TriBxVxxxxx_xx.bin 1-1 DP-TriCxVxxxxxa_xx.bin 1-2 DP-TriCxVxxxxxb.bin 1-3 DP-TriDxVxxxxx_xx.bin 1-1 DP-TriExVxxxxxa_xx.bin 1-2 DP-TriExVxxxxxb.bin 1-3 DP-180_190SPCAxVxxxxxx.bin 2
When you select the Parent Folder, the following Firmware Type window appears. Proper Firmware Files are selected automatically by selecting the Firmware Type. The transferring order is set up automatically.
Note: 1. While updating the firmware code, the display may become garbled, however, it will return to normal upon completion of the firmware update. 2. Please refer to the service manual for additional details. 3. The suffix "_xx" for the Folder Name or File Name may not exist depending on the destination location.
80
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
3.5.4.
1. Before starting, print the F5/F6 Parameters List (Copy Service Mode F9-03-00). 2. Turn the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the OFF position. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord.) 3. Install the appropriate Master Firmware Card into the machine. 4. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position. 5. Press FUNCTION, ORIGINAL SIZE keys and then Key 3 on the keypad sequentially. 6. Perform the Copy Service Mode F9-07-00 (Update From Master Card). 7. The firmware is copied into the machine. 8. After the update is completed, the machine reboots itself and returns to standby. 9. Turn the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the OFF position. 10. Remove the Master Firmware Card from the machine. 11. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position. 12. Reprogram the F5 & F6 Parameters according to the lists printed in Step 1 above if the settings are other than factory default. Note: After the update is completed, the machine reboots itself and returns to standby mode. Repeat the above steps if there are additional firmware code files to be updated. Confirm that the update was successfully completed by checking the Firmware Version with F9 Parameters F9-02-xx. Caution: If the unit does not boot up properly in step 8, refer to Service Manual 3.5.8. (Firmware Emergency Recovery)
Updating the Firmware using the Master Firmware Card (Alternate Method)
UF-9000 DP-180/190
3.5.5.
1) Install the Local Firmware Update Tool to your PC The option CD-ROM includes the Local Firmware Update Tool and the Main Unit Firmware Code. Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Local Firmware Update Tool. Operating Instructions: \xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\FIRMUP OI.pdf (Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD) Setup: \xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\Setup\Setup.exe 2) Preparing the Firmware Code Double click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File and copy the Firmware Code File on the CD-ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked. Example: From: Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.bat [Navy Blue Control Panel] Firmware Code File: UF-9000_AUR_xxxxxxxx.exe or DP-190_180_AUR_xxxxxxxx.exe [Light Blue Control Panel] Firmware Code File: To: Firmware Data Folder: UF-9000_AU_xxxxxxxx.exe or DP-190_180_AU_xxxxxxxx.exe C:\ Panasonic \ Panasonic-FUP \ Data
81
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Programming Master Card Important: DO NOT connect the USB Cable yet. 1. Turn the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the OFF position. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord.) 2. Insert/Remove the Flash Memory Card (4 MB or 8 MB) into/from the machine. 3. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position. 4. Press FUNCTION, ORIGINAL SIZE keys and then Key 3 on the keypad sequentially. 5. Perform the Update Program Card Mode F9-09 (Update Program Card). The unit is now ready to accept the firmware code from the USB Port. Now connect the USB Cable between the Unit and PC. (Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD) Repeat the above steps if there are additional master firmware cards to be programmed.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
B. Copying the Firmware from an Existing Machine using a Flash Memory Card (4 MB or 8 MB) 1. Turn the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the OFF position. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord.) 2. Install a Flash Memory Card (4 MB or 8 MB) into the machine. 3. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position. 4. Press FUNCTION, ORIGINAL SIZE keys and then Key 3 on the keypad sequentially. 5. Perform the Copy Service Mode F9-08 (Program Backup). 6. The firmware is copied into the Flash Memory Card. 7. After the backup is completed, press "STOP" first and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to return to standby. 8. Turn the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the OFF position. 9. Remove the Master Firmware Card that you just created from the machine. 10. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position. 11. Use this Master Firmware Card to update the firmware on other machines.
3.5.6.
1. Turn the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the OFF position. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord.) 2. Install the Master Firmware Card into the machine. 3. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position. 4. Press FUNCTION, ORIGINAL SIZE keys and then Key 3 on the keypad sequentially. 5. Perform the Service Mode F9-09 (Update Program Card). 6. After the Flash Memory Card is erased, machine prompts READY TO PROGRAM PRESS SET TO START. Press STOP. 7. Press "STOP" first and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to return to standby. 8. Turn the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the OFF position. 9. Remove the blank Flash Memory Card from the machine. 10. Repeat from Step 2 above if you are erasing another Master Firmware Card.
82
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
3.5.7. User Authentication Function Confirmation (Specified Destinations only) (Incorporated into production, starting with Serial No. prefix CF [March 2006] and above)
UF-9000 DP-180/190
If your customer requires User Authentication, first verify whether your machine has this feature, or verify that the machine's Firmware version is 4 or later by following the steps below. If the version is below 4, then you cannot add this feature. Once the version is confirmed, setup the User Authentication feature by referring to the Operating Instructions (For User Authentication). 3.5.7.1. Checking whether the User Authentication is available 1. Press the COPY key to enter the Copy Function Mode. 2. Press the FUNCTION key to enter the Function Mode. 3. Press the 1 key, and then press SET key to enter the General Settings Mode. 4. Press the 9 key to enter the Key Operator Mode. 5. Input the 3 Digit Code, and then press SET key. (Default setting 000) 6. Press the 3 key twice, if 33 USER AUTH 1:COPY displays on the LCD, this signifies that User Authentication is available on the machine. 7. Press the RESET key, to exit the General Settings mode. 8. If 33 USER AUTH 1:COPY is not displayed on the LCD, then you cannot add this feature. 3.5.7.2. Checking the Firmware Version with the General Settings List 1. Press the COPY key to enter the Copy Function Mode. 2. Press the FUNCTION key to enter the Function Mode. 3. Press the 1 key, and then press SET key to enter the General Settings Mode. 4. Press the 9 key to enter the Key Operator Mode. 5. Input the 3 Digit Code, and then press SET key. (Default setting 000) 6. Press the 0 key, and then press SET key. 7. Press the SET key, to print the GENERAL SETTINGS LIST. 8. Verify the Footer of the printed List. For example ******* DP-190 v4 *******. 9. If the firmware is below version 4 (For example ******* DP-190 *******), then you cannot add this feature.
83
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
3.5.8.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
After the Hard Disk Drive Unit is installed, to prevent a Scan Disk Function from being performed (similar to when the power is abruptly interrupted to the PC), it is important to follow the step sequence below when turning OFF the Power Switch on the machine. 1. If the machine is in the "ENERGY SAVER (Shutdown Mode)", you may turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position. If it is not in the "ENERGY SAVER (Shutdown Mode)", continue to step 2 below. 2. Press "FUNCTION" and "ENERGY SAVER" keys simultaneously first. 3. Wait approximately 10 seconds while the machine writes the closing status onto the Hard Disk Drive Unit and advances into ENERGY SAVER MODE. 4. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position. 5. Unplug the AC Power Cord. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord.) 6. After finishing the installation of the Hard Disk Drive, please go over the above Power Down procedure with the customer to avoid the Scan Disk Function from being performed (indicated by SCANNING HARD DISK message on the display), and customer inquiries related to abrupt Power Off. 7. Reconnect the Telephone Line Cable if it was disconnected.
3.5.9.
The easiest method to recover the firmware in an Emergency Recovery routine is to use the Master Firmware Flash Card method (1 Flash Card required). Whichever method you select, it is easier to restore the machine's firmware to the Standard (AAV) Type first as it only requires 1 file (SC) to bring the machine to initial working condition. Note: It is not possible to recover the SPC using this method. After recovering, if optional PCL or PS/PCL firmware is required, use the Network Firmware Update Tool or the Local Firmware Update Tool to update the firmware to the required level. If the unit does not boot up properly, follow the steps below: 1. Turn the power Off. Before proceeding to the next step, you must create the Master Firmware Flash Cards (read the appropriate sections first 3.5.5). 2. Turn the power On while holding the [ENERGY SAVER] button. 3. When the green lamp on the front panel turns On, release the [ENERGY SAVER] button. The unit is now ready to accept the firmware code from Master Firmware Card. Repeat the above steps if there are additional firmware code files to be updated.
84
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
DX-TRI A A Vxxxxx (a) AU DP-TRI A A Vxxxxx (a) AU Destination Code (Fax) AU : USA/Canada AB : UK Destination Code (Copier) PU : USA/Canada PB : UK Division Soft (When it is divided into (a) and (b)) Firmware Version (V1xxxx) Language Code A : A-English, C-French & Spanish B : A-English, Spanish & Portuguese b : English, French & Spanish g : German, French & Italian etc. Firmware Type A : Standard B, C, D, E : Optional Model Number
SPC
Model Number
85
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
3.6.
When installing the Paper Tray option, the following LSU Image Side to Side adjustment may be required. The Printer registration is adjusted at the factory. If copy image is abnormal, especially in the Rotation Copy mode, adjust it by the following procedure.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
3.6.1.
1. Insert Letter or A4 size paper into the 1st tray and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper size. Empty all the remaining trays (including the bypass tray) to disable them. 2. Press FUNCTION, ORIGINAL SIZE keys and then Key 3 on the keypad sequentially. 3. Perform the Service Mode F1-03 (Print Test Pattern 1). 4. Check the gap of the print pattern from the paper edge, refer to the Figure below. 5. Perform the Service Mode F6-04 (Printer Registration) to adjust the gap to be 5 mm. 6. If the gap is less than 5 mm, input a (-) value. If more than 5 mm, input a (+) value. 8. Press "STOP" first and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to return to standby.
<Figure> Two lines are printed on the top (Lead edge). For Letter or A4, place as Portrait.
Printer Registration
5 mm
5 mm
3.6.2.
1. Insert Letter or A4 size paper into the 1st tray and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper size. Empty all the remaining trays (including the bypass tray) to disable them. Note: Do not pull out the 1st tray to disable it when adjusting the 2nd tray. The 1st tray is required as it acts as a paper path for the paper in the 2nd tray. 2. Press FUNCTION, ORIGINAL SIZE keys and then Key 3 on the keypad sequentially. 3. Perform the Service Mode F1-03 (Print Test Pattern 1). 4. Check the gap of the print pattern from the paper edge, refer to the Figure above. 5. Perform the Service Mode F6-10 to F6-12, to adjust the gap to be 5 mm. 6. If the gap is less than 5 mm, input a (+) value. If more than 5 mm, input a (-) value. 7. Proceed the above steps for other Tray. 8. Press "STOP" first and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to return to standby.
86
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
3.6.3.
1. Insert Letter or A4 size paper into the 1st tray and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper size. Empty all the remaining trays (including the bypass tray) to disable them. 2. Press FUNCTION, ORIGINAL SIZE keys and then Key 3 on the keypad sequentially. 3. Perform the Service Mode F1-06 (Print Test Pattern 4). 4. Check the gap of the print pattern from the paper edge, refer to the Figure above. 5. Perform the Service Mode F6-16 (ADU Side Adjust), to adjust the gap to be 5 mm. 6. If the gap is less than 5 mm, input a (+) value. If more than 5 mm, input a (-) value. 7. Press "STOP" first and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to return to standby.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
3.6.4.
1. Place the Original Document on the Platen Scanner. 2. Insert Letter or A4 size paper into the 1st tray and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper size. Empty all the remaining trays (including the bypass tray) to disable them. 3. Press FUNCTION, ORIGINAL SIZE keys and then Key 3 on the keypad sequentially. 4. Perform the Service Mode F2 (Single Copy Test). 5. Check the Image size of the Copy and the Original as Portrait. 6. Perform the Service Mode F6-03 (Original Registration), to adjust the Original Registration. 7. If the gap is smaller than the Original, input a (-) value. If bigger than the Original, input a (+) value. 8. Perform the Service Mode F6-53 (CCD Read Position), to adjust the CCD Read for the side position. 9. If the gap is smaller than the Original, input a (+) value. If bigger than the Original, input a (-) value. 10. Press "STOP" first and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to return to standby.
3.6.5.
1. Place the Original Document on the ADF. 2. Insert Letter or A4 size paper into the 1st tray and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper size. Empty all the remaining trays (including the bypass tray) to disable them. 3. Press FUNCTION, ORIGINAL SIZE keys and then Key 3 on the keypad sequentially. 4. Perform the Service Mode F2 (Single Copy Test). 5. Check the Image size of the Copy and the Original as Portrait. 6. Perform the Service Mode F6-91 (Original Read Edge ADF), to adjust the ADF Original Read Edge. 7. If the gap is less than the Original, input a (+) value. If bigger than the Original, input a (-) value. 8. Perform the Service Mode F6-90 (ADF Image Read Start), to adjust the ADF Main Scan for Side position. 9. If the gap is less than the Original, input a (+) value. If bigger than the Original, input a (-) value. 10. Press "STOP" first and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to return to standby.
87
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
4 Troubleshooting
4.1. Initial Troubleshooting Flowchart
START Plug the Power Cord, and turn the Power Switches ON.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
No Does the LCD display function correctly? Yes Troubleshoot any 3-digit INFO. CODE displayed. No Troubleshoot Improper LCD Display (Sect. 4.2).
No Does the original document No feed through correctly? Troubleshoot the Yes Document Feeder (Sect. 4.5). Does the recording paper No exit the unit? Yes
Troubleshoot communication problems (transmission, reception, dialing, network connection, polling, information codes, or diagnostic codes).
88
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
4.2.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Is LED/LCD displayed? No
Does CNP306, pin 6 on the SC Yes PCB measure +5 VDC? No Replace the SC PCB. Is the trouble resolved? Yes END END
Note: LCD Display Brightness Adjustment To adjust the brightness of the LCD display, press and while holding down the "CLEAR" key, keep pressing the "ORIGINAL SIZE" or the "COPY SIZE" key until the desired brightness is achieved. ORIGINAL SIZE : Dimmer COPY SIZE : Brighter
Replace the LCD Module. Replace the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit. Is the trouble resolved? Yes
No
No
89
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
4.3.
4.3.1.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
START
No 1. Check all connectors and voltages on the Power Supply Unit. 2. Check the contacts between PSU and Toner Cartridge. 3. Replace the PSU. No 1. Check all connectors and voltages on the SC PCB. 2. Replace the SC PCB.
END
90
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
4.3.2.
Blank Copy
Paper Travel
UF-9000 DP-180/190
START
Is the Toner Cartridge operational? Yes Are there any foreign particles or stains on the BTR? No
Yes 1. Clean the BTR with a soft, dry cloth. 2. Replace the BTR.
No 1. Check all connectors and voltages on the Power Supply Unit. 2. Check the Connector and voltage on the Power Supply Unit. 3. Replace the Power Supply Unit. Yes 1. Remove the particles from the laser beam path or clean the stains. 2. Replace the Laser Unit (LSU).
Are there any foreign particles or stains blocking the Laser Beam path? No
No 1. Check all connectors and voltages on the SC PCB. 2. Replace the SC PCB.
END
91
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
4.3.3.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
P
START Is the printout in Service Mode 3 normal? No Yes Is the recording paper damp? No Yes
Is the Toner Cartridge operational? Yes Are there any foreign particles or stains blocking the Laser Beam path? No
Yes 1. Remove the particles from the laser beam path or clean the stains. 2. Replace the Laser Unit (LSU).
1. Clean the BTR with a soft, dry cloth. 2. Replace the BTR.
END
92
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
4.3.4.
Ghost Images
Paper Travel
UF-9000 DP-180/190
A AAA A
START
Is the Toner Cartridge operational? Yes Are there any foreign particles or stains on the BTR? No
Yes 1. Clean the BTR with a soft, dry cloth. 2. Replace the BTR. No Clean or replace the rollers.
END
93
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
4.3.5.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
P
START Is the printout in Service Mode 3 normal? No Yes No Is the Toner Cartridge operational? Yes
1. Clean the Corona Wire as illustrated below. 2. Replace the Toner Cartridge.
Yes 1. Clean the BTR with a soft, dry cloth. 2. Replace the BTR. No Replace the Laser Unit (LSU).
END
Carefully wipe the Corona Wire in the Toner Cartridge by sliding a dry Cotton Swab from end to end a few times.
Corona Wire
94
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
4.3.6.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
P
START Is the printout in Service Mode 3 normal? No Yes Is the Toner Cartridge operational? Yes No
Yes Are there any foreign particles or stains on the BTR? No 1. Clean the BTR with a soft, dry cloth. 2. Replace the BTR.
No 1. Check all connectors and voltages on the Power Supply Unit . 2. Check the Connector and voltage on the Power Supply Unit. 3. Replace the Power Supply Unit. No Clean or replace the rollers.
END
95
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
4.3.7.
Dark Background
UF-9000 DP-180/190
P
START Is the printout in Service Mode 3 normal? No Yes Is the recording paper damp? No Yes
No 1. Check all connectors and voltages on the Power Supply Unit (HVPS). 2. Replace the Power Supply Unit (HVPS).
END
96
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
Paper Travel
4.3.8.
Light Print
Paper Travel
UF-9000 DP-180/190
START
Is the Toner Cartridge operational? Yes Are there any foreign particles or stains blocking the Laser Unit path? No
Yes 1. Remove the particles from the laser beam path or clean the stains. 2. Replace the LSU. No 1. Check all connectors and voltages on the Power Supply Unit (HVPS). 2. Replace the Power Supply Unit (HVPS) . No Clean or replace the rollers.
97
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
4.3.9.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
P
START Is the printout in Service Mode 3 normal? No Yes Is the recording paper damp? No Yes
Is the Toner Cartridge operational? Yes Are there any foreign particles or stains on the BTR? No
Yes 1. Clean the BTR with a soft, dry cloth. 2. Replace the BTR. No 1. Check all connectors and voltages on the Power Supply Unit (HVPS). 2. Replace the Power Supply Unit (HVPS). No Clean or replace the rollers.
END
98
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
Paper Travel
4.3.10. Improper Fusing (Printed image does not bond to the paper)
UF-9000 DP-180/190
P
START
Is the recording paper damp?
Yes
Replace the recording paper.
No
END
Note: Replace the entire Fuser Unit when the Thermostat, the Thermal Fuse or the Thermistor Assembly becomes an open-circuit.
99
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
4.3.11.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
P
START Is the recording paper damp? No Yes Is the Toner Cartridge operational? Yes Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller surfaces clean? Yes No No
END
100
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
P
START Is the Toner Cartridge operational? Yes Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller surfaces clean? Yes No No
END
101
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
START
Yes Ensure the paper is set under the Paper Separation Clips in the Cassette.
Yes 1. Remove any foreign particles or clean the stains. 2. Replace the Fuser Unit.
END
102
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Make a local copy. No Check the Transmission Block. (CCD PCB and SC PCB)
Perform a receiving test with the reference fax unit. No 1. Check the SC PCB. 2. Check the FXB PCB. 3. Check the Telephone Line Cable. 4. Replace the SC PCB.
Is a poor copy printed only when receiving from a specific transmitter? Yes The transmitting machine may be defective.
END
103
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
No 1. Adjust the Paper Width Guide. 2. Adjust the Paper Length Guide. 3. Ensure the paper is under the Paper Separation Clips.
Are there any foreign particles or paper pieces in the receiver unit? No
Yes Remove the foreign particles or paper pieces from the receiver unit. No 1. Check all rollers, gears, drive clutches and springs. 2. Adjust or replace any defective parts.
END
104
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Are there any foreign particles or paper pieces in the scanning area? No
Yes Remove the foreign particles or paper pieces from the scanning area.
Yes Clean the Scanning Glass. Clean the Mirrors. Yes Clean the rollers.
Yes 1. Check SC PCB. 2. Check CCD PCB. 3. Replace the SC PCB (Sect. 2.). 4. Replace the CIS Assembly (Sect. 2.).
END
105
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
4.4.
4.4.1.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
No Is the Separation Rubber worn out? Yes No Clean or adjust the Separation Rubber Pressure (Sect. 2.).
No Does the ADF Roller's gear system function properly? Yes No Adjust the gear system or replace defective parts.
END
106
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
4.4.2.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
No Is the Separation Rubber worn out? Yes No Clean or adjust the Separation Rubber Pressure (Sect. 2.).
No Does the ADF Roller's gear system function properly? Yes No Adjust the gear system or replace defective parts.
END
107
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
4.4.3.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
e
Is the ADF Unit closed?
No
Close the ADF Unit firmly.
Yes
No
Clean or replace Sensor PCB.
Yes
No
Clean the surface of roller with water.
Yes
No
Adjust or replace any defective parts.
Yes
END
108
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
4.5.
This section explains general troubleshooting procedures for the 400 series of Information Codes. These errors are primarily caused by poor telephone line quality (loss, noise, echo, etc.). This unit is furnished with Service Mode 1 to assist in troubleshooting line quality problems. It is suggested that both the transmitting unit and receiving unit be adjusted. This section gives relevant parameters in Service Mode 1 for the transmitting and receiving sides. If no improvement is realized after the parameters are adjusted, it is recommended that the parameters be returned to the default settings.
Communications
UF-9000 DP-180/190
4.5.1.
Communication Trouble
START Perform a communication test after changing settings.
Yes TransmittingSide #021 : Off #025 : 1st On 2nd ReceivingSide #018 : 14400 bps 12000 to 2400 bps #024 : 2100 Hz 1080 Hz #030 : 75 ms 1 sec #033 : 33600 bps 31200 to 2400 bps/ TC9600/TC7200
To equalize loss (Amplitude Distortion) between the fax unit and the phone company exchange. TransmittingSide #014 : 0 dBm 4, 8, 12 dBm ReceivingSide #013 : 0 dBm 4, 8, 12 dBm
To improve a poor S/N (signal-to-noise ratio). TransmittingSide #010 : -9 dBm 0 to -15 dBm #017 : 14400 bps 12000 to 2400 bps #033 : 33600 bps 31200 to 2400 bps ReceivingSide #011 : -43 dBm -33 dBm or -38 dBm #018 : 14400 bps 12000 to 2400 bps #019 : On Off #023 : Normal Long #033 : 33600 bps 31200 to 2400 bps
To cope with shifted signal sequences caused by an echo. TransmittingSide #025 : 1st 2nd ReceivingSide #024 : 2100 Hz 1080 Hz #030 : 75 ms 1 sec
109
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
4.5.2.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Make a copy.
No Is the LED Array lit? Yes No Does +24 VDC alive on the SC PCB? Yes Does nLEDON go Low when the scan starts? Yes
Does the problem still occur? Yes Replace the LED Array. Are CN (SC PCB) and CN (CCD PCB) connected properly? Yes 1. Replace the Scanner Block. 2. Replace the SC PCB. Is the transmitted copy normal? Yes No 1. Check CN (SC PCB) and CN (FXB PCB). 2. Check the telephone line cable. Replace if necessary. No Telephone line quality is poor. No Connect them correctly.
Does poor transmitted copy appear when transmitting to a specific receiver? Yes The receiving unit may be defective.
END
110
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
4.5.3.
Dialing Problems
START
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Yes 1. Set documents on the ADF correctly. 2. Check the telephone line connection. 3. The called party is busy. 4. Refer to Sect. 4.
Yes Adjust the monitor volume by pressing the "/\" or "\/" curser keys.
END
111
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
4.5.4.
Transmission Problems
START
UF-9000 DP-180/190
No 1. No ID function at the remote unit. 2. The ID is not set for the remote unit.
No 1. Set "STAMP=ON" 2. Check the SC PCB. 3. Replace the Stamp Solenoid. 4. Replace the SC PCB.
END
112
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
4.5.5.
Reception Problems
START
UF-9000 DP-180/190
No 1. Set "RCV = AUTO" 2. Check that all covers are closed firmly. 3. Check the telephone line connection. 4. Check the Ringer Timing or DRD setting. 5. Check the recording paper path. 6. Check the SC PCB and FXB PCB. 7. Replace the FXB PCB. 8. Replace the SC PCB.
END
113
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
4.5.6.
Polling Problems
START
UF-9000 DP-180/190
No 1. Set the same polling password as the other party is using. 2. Check the password of the remote unit.
No 1. Set the polling password or no - check mode.* 2. Check the password of the remote unit.
END
114
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
4.6.
4.6.1.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
115
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
4.6.2.
It is beyond the scope of this Service Manual to cover Networking in detail, there are many excellent manuals on this subject, but we hope the information in this section will aid with your troubleshooting efforts. In most cases, the Network Administrator will be able to provide you with needed information or assistance. When encountering Network problems during an onsite service call or during the installation stage, try to isolate the steps that are not being completed so that you can quickly locate the components that don't work. It is best to organize your troubleshooting efforts by understanding what should be happening, then you can trace the path and see where the problem is occurring. In our case, we use TCP/IP for transportation of data from one system to another, which involves a whole series of events occurring throughout a number of different layers. As with all networking, TCP/IP works better when its plugged in, therefore, start your troubleshooting by checking the Physical Connectivity first, the cable(s). In our examples, we'll use several simple tools readily available in the DOS command-line utility for troubleshooting. There are many other utilities available for checking more detailed information, some are Free of charge, others are available for a nominal fee. 1. System Diagram Model Ask the customer to provide you with the Pre-Installation Information form, that was filled out by the Network Administrator. A description or system diagram for the unit, including its physical address, email server and DNS server is required.
Network Configuration Domain Name: labo.mgcs.com
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Network D PC Client [210.232.71.18] js2.labo.mgcs.com SMTP/POP DNS Server Server sv2.labo.mgcs.com [192.168.1.2] WAN
sv1.labo.mgcs.com [192.168.1.1]
Network A [192.168.3.0]
"ping"
Network C [192.168.4.0]
116
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
2. Checking the Current Configuration Print the current unit Internet Parameters configuration. Locate a PC connected to the same Subnet Mask as the unit, then from the DOS Prompt, type the following command-line utility: "ipconfig /all" for Windows 98/Me/XP/2000/NT.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Verify that the displayed Network configuration on the PC, matches the following Internet Parameter settings of the unit: Default Gateway IP Address: DNS Server IP Address: Subnet Mask: (whether it is valid) For Windows 98 / Me / XP / 2000 / NT The following example shows the output after you type "ipconfig /all" at a command prompt:
C:\>ipconfig /all Windows NT IP Configuration Host Name DNS Servers Node Type NetBIOS Scope ID IP Routing Enabled. WINS Proxy Enabled NetBIOS Resolution Uses DNS Ethernet adapter IBMFE1 Description Physical Address DHCP Enabled IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Primary WINS Server : ec4.labo.pcc.com : 192.168.1.1 : Hybrid : : No : No : No : : IBM 100/10 EtherJet PCI Adapter : 00-04-AC-EE-9C-E8 : No : 192.168.3.4 : 255.255.255.0 : 192.168.3.254 : 192.168.3.18
From the above examples, you know the Network configuration for the specified Subnet Mask is as follows: IP Address: 192.168.3.4; Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0; Default Gateway (Default Router IP Address): 192.168.3.254; DNS Server: 192.168.1.1 and the Domain Name: labo.mgcs.com (obtained from the Host Name). 3. Using "PING" to Test Physical Connectivity The Packet Internet Groper (PING) is a command-line tool included with every Microsoft TCP/IP client (any DOS or Windows client with the TCP/IP protocol installed). PING is a simple utility that is used to send a test packet to a specified IP Address or Hostname, then, if everything is working properly, the packet is echoed back (returned). Sample command-line PINGing and parameters are shown below. There are several available options that can be specified with the PING command. However, for our examples, we will use two options (-n and -w) which are commonly used when the response from the destination location is too long. -n count : -w timeout : The number of echo requests that the command should send. The default is four. Specifies the period PING will wait for the reply before deciding that the host is not responding.
117
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
If for some reason, the physical connection is missing, the echo reply will not be received from the destination and the following output is displayed:
C:\WINDOWS>ping fmrt7.labo.pcc.com Pinging fmrt7.labo.pcc.com [192.168.4.1] with 32 bytes of data: Request timed out. Request timed out. Request timed out. Request timed out. Ping statistics for 192.168.4.1: Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 0, Lost = 4 (100% loss), Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds: Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0ms
118
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
If the physical destination is far and it's connected by WAN (Wide Area Network), the PING option command default value must be changed to compensate for the expected delayed response. e.g. -n 10 -w 2000 : :
UF-9000 DP-180/190
The number of echo requests that the command should send. Specifies the period PING will wait for the reply before deciding that the host is not responding.
C:\WINDOWS>ping js2.labo.pcc.com -n 10 -w 2000 Pinging js2.labo.pcc.com [210.232.71.18] with 32 bytes of data: Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=633ms TTL=252 Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=645ms TTL=252 Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=810ms TTL=252 Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=455ms TTL=252 Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=645ms TTL=252 Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=633ms TTL=252 Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=677ms TTL=252 Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=703ms TTL=252 Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=633ms TTL=252 Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=633ms TTL=252
4. Tracing a Packet Route Another useful command-line utility is TRACERT, which is used to verify the route a packet takes to reach its destination. The result shows each router crossed and how long it took to get through each particular router to reach the specified destination. The time it takes to get through a particular router is calculated three times and displayed for each router hop along with the IP Address of each router crossed. If a FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name) is available, it will be displayed as well. This utility is useful for two diagnostic purposes: a. To detect whether a particular router is malfunctioning along a known path. For example, if you know that packets on a network always go through London to get from New York to Berlin, but the communication is failing. A TRACERT to the Berlin address shows all the hops up to the point where the router in London should respond. If it does not respond, the time values are shown with an asterisk (*), indicating the packet timed out. b. To determine whether a router is slow and needs to be upgraded or additional routers should be installed on the network. You can determine this by simply comparing the time it takes for a packet to get through a particular router. If its return time is significantly higher than the other routers, it should be upgraded. To use this utility, from the DOS command-line, type: tracert <IP Address or Hostname> Tracing the Route to SMTP/POP Server
C:\WINDOWS>tracert sv2.labo.pcc.com Tracing route to sv2.labo.pcc.com [192.168.1.2] over a maximum of 30 hops: 1 2 4 ms 4 ms 2 ms 5 ms 2 ms 192.168.3.254 5 ms sv2.labo.pcc.com [192.168.1.2]
Trace complete.
119
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
5. Managing Network Route Tables In the simplest case a router connects two network segments. In this model, the system used to join the two segments needs to know only about these segments. The routing table for router R1 in this case is simple; the following table shows its key routes: Network Address 192.168.3.0 192.168.1.0 Netmask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 Gateway 192.168.3.254 192.168.1.253 Interface 192.168.3.254 192.168.1.253
UF-9000 DP-180/190
When the Unit at 192.168.3.5 attempts to communicate with the Unit at 192.168.1.x, IP performs the ANDing process to find two things: The local network ID is 192.168.3.0, and the destination network ID is not. This means, that the destination host is not on the local network. IP, is responsible to find a route to the remote network, and therefore, it consults the routing table. Here, the local host normally determines that the next step in the route is the Default Gateway, and sends the packet to router R1. The router R1, receives the packet. After determining that the packet is for another host and not the router itself, it checks the routing table. It finds the route to 192.168.1.0 and sends the packet through the interface to the Unit at 192.168.1.x, which receives the packet. This is a simple route that took only a single hop. When another network is added as the number of hosts grows, it gets complicated, and the systems on the most distant networks cannot communicate. When the router receives a packet in this case, it cannot find a route to the remote network. It then discards the packet and a message indicating "destination host unreachable" is sent to the originator. Here, is where the ROUTE command-line utility is useful when dealing with more than two networks, and is used by Administrators to statically manage a route table by adding, deleting, changing and clearing the route table. It has a number of options that are used to manipulate the routing tables, some are shown below: MASK If this switch is present, the next parameter is interpreted as the netmask parameter. Netmask If included, specifies a sub-net mask value to be associated with this route entry. If not specified, it defaults to 255.255.255.255. Gateway Specifies the gateway. METRIC Specifies the metric / cost for the destination. All symbolic names used for the destination are looked up in the network database file NETWORKS. The symbolic names for the gateway are looked up the host name database file HOSTS.
120
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
When the packet does not reach the specified destination even when the physical connection is properly made, check the registered persistent routes on the same subnet as the Unit by typing "route print" in the DOS command-line. The output display is shown below:
C:\WINDOWS>route print Active Routes: Network Address 0.0.0.0 127.0.0.0 192.168.3.0 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.255 224.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 Netmask 0.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.255 255.255.255.255 224.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 Gateway Address 192.168.3.254 127.0.0.1 192.168.3.2 127.0.0.1 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.2 Interface 192.168.3.2 127.0.0.1 192.168.3.2 127.0.0.1 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.2 Metric 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
UF-9000 DP-180/190
6. Host Name Query on DNS Server Windows XP/2000/NT 4.0 also has a tool that enables you to test DNS to verify that it is working properly. This utility is not available on Windows 98/Me. From the DOS command-line, type "NSLOOKUP" to display the following output:
C:\>nslookup Default Server: sv1.labo.pcc.com Address: 192.168.1.1
NS(Name Server) Record in Domain From the DOS command-line, type "Is -t NS <Domain Name>" to display the following output:
> ls -t NS labo.pcc.com. [sv1.labo.pcc.com.] labo.pcc.com. NS server = sv1.labo.pcc.com
MX(Mail Exchange) Record in Domain From the DOS command-line, type "Is -t MX <Domain Name>" to display the following output:
> ls -t MX labo.pcc.com [sv1.labo.pcc.com] labo.pcc.com. MX
10 sv2.labo.pcc.com
A (Address) Record in Domain From the DOS command-line, type "Is -t A <Domain Name>" to display the following output:
> ls -t A labo.pcc.com [sv1.labo.pcc.com] labo.pcc.com. NS server = sv1.labo.pcc.com sv1 A 192.168.1.1 sv2 A 192.168.1.2 ec5 A 192.168.1.4 A 192.168.3.4 ec4 A 192.168.3.5 ef1
121
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
7. Testing Unit Using the TELNET Command TELNET is a terminal emulation protocol. TELNET enables PCs and workstations to function as dumb terminals in sessions with hosts on internet works. From Windows 98/Me/XP/2000/NT, use the TELNET to test the communication of TCP/IP and SMTP Protocol manually to the Unit. This method eliminates the SMTP Server. For better understanding, type "telnet" in the DOS Command-line to bring up the Telnet screen. Then, click on the Terminal menu and on Preferences, check the "Local Echo" and "Block Cursor" radio dials and click on the OK button. Click on the Connect menu, then click on Remote System. Enter "25" in the "Port:" field and click on Connect button. For example,
C:\WINDOWS>telnet telnet to ef1.labo.pcc.com[192.168.3.5] 220 ef1.labo.pcc.com DP18xx V.xx helo 250 Hello mail from:test 250 Sender OK rcpt to:fax@labo.pcc.com 250 Receipient OK data 354 Email, end with "CRLF . CR LF" [Press the Enter Key] Panasonic Internet Fax test test [Press the Enter Key] [Press the Enter Key] [Press the Enter Key] 250 OK, Mail accept quit 221 Closing transaction channel
UF-9000 DP-180/190
122
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
4.7.
The self-diagnostic functions detect troubles in the important components of the copier. When trouble occurs, the copier stops. Note: Some Codes are not used in the UF-9000/DP-180/190, and are reserved for future use.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
4.7.1.
Note: Uxx and a message will appear on the Panel Display. User Error Codes (U Code) Table Item Check Points CLOSE FRONT COVER 1. Front Cover is open. 2. Front Cover Sensor is disconnected. 3. Front Cover Sensor is defective. 4. LVPS connector is disconnected. 5. LVPS is defective. 6. Engine PCB is defective. TONER IS RUNNING LOW 1. Toner Cartridge is incorrectly installed. or 2. Low Toner. OUT OF TONER 3. Toner Sensor is disconnected. 4. Toner Sensor is defective. 5. Engine PCB connector is disconnected. 6. Engine PCB is defective. NO CARTRIDGE 1. No Toner Cartridge. CLOSE ADF COVER 1. ADF Cover is open. 2. ADF is not installed correctly. 3. ADF Cover Sensor is disconnected. 4. ADF Cover Sensor is defective. 5. LVPS connector is disconnected. 6. LVPS is defective. CLOSE PLATEN COVER While the copier is initializing, the ADF Cover was opened. SCANNER SELF-CHECK 1. SC/SPC PCB connector is disconnected. 2. SC/SPC PCB is defective. REPLACE BATTERY Backup Battery is wearing out.
Code U01
U13
U16 U20
123
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
4.7.1.1.
Low Toner Messages / Operation The Toner Cartridge Yield is approximately 5,000 pages using Letter or A4 size paper and 5% Black coverage, however, the maximum yield will not exceed 6,000 pages. The machine controls the printer to maintain good print quality by controlling the Bias Voltage with the Low Toner Sensor and the Print Counter. There are three Toner warning LCD Displays: LCD 1: [TONER IS RUNNING LOW: U13] Low Toner sensor detects Low Toner or the machine has printed 5,500 pages. Preparing a new cartridge for replacement is recommended. LCD 2: [WARNING TONER LOW LESS THAN 50 PAGES] 450 pages have been printed since the LCD 1 appeared. Replacement with the new cartridge is recommended. LCD 3: [OUT OF TONER: U13] 50 pages have been printed after LCD 2 appeared or 6,000 pages have been printed. Replace with the new cartridge. When replacing with a New Cartridge, perform the steps below to reset the Print Counter. 1. Press "FUNCTION" key. 2. Press "1" or the "Arrow" key to enter "GENERAL SETTINGS". 3. Press "SET" key. 4. Press "4" to enter "04 TONER REPLACEMENT PRESS SET TO SELECT". 5. Press "SET" key, then "TONER REPLACEMENT? 1:Yes 2:No". 6. Press "1" key to reset the Print Counter. 7. Press "STOP" key to return to the Standby mode.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
124
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
4.7.2.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
B C
Section A B C
Jam Location ADF Paper Transport / Exit Area Paper Entry Area
Code J00 J01 J02 J43 J44 J70 J71 J80 J82 J83 J92 J93
Jam Error Codes (J Codes) Table Contents Section The Registration Sensor did not detect paper within a predetermined time after paper started feeding. (Sheet Bypass) The Registration Sensor did not detect paper within a predetermined time after the C Paper Feed Roller started rotating. (1st Feeder Unit) The Registration Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the Paper Feed Roller started rotating. (2nd Feeder Unit) Paper Jam in the Registration Sensor or Paper Path Sensor. B, C Paper Jam in the Paper Exit / ADU Paper Jam Sensor. Read Point Sensor does not go ON within 10 seconds after the original starts feeding. (Information Code 030 is printed on the Transaction Journal instead.) A Original was longer than 78.7 in (2m). (Information Code 031 or 032 is printed on the Transaction Journal instead.) The Automatic Duplex Unit (ADU) Entrance Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time. The ADU Exit Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after ADU C Middle Sensor is activated. The ADU Entrance Sensor keeps detecting paper after a predetermined time has lapsed. The Original was pulled out when feeding an original. A The Original remained in the ADF.
125
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
126
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
4.7.2.1.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Normal Function
COPY, PRINT mode EXIT TRAY FULL: EMPTY & PRESS START FAX/EMAIL, SCAN mode EXIT TRAY FULL: PRESS COPY
STOP
1 If next Job is performed at this point in time Copy Copy or Print Cancel "Pi Pi Pi" Sound Print *1 Is Sort Memory Space Available? Yes Wait for Previous Job to Complete No Time Out -> Error Display on Print Queue Screen
*1 : Same Function as when the next print job is received in Queue during Paper Jam
F5-10: [2] After Pending Job is Completed, Printing Will Start F5-10: [1]
Start Print Count from 0 Add the Previous Page of a Job as Accumulative Print Count
127
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
4.7.3.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Check Points 1. Home Position Sensor connector is disconnected. 2. Home Position Sensor is defective. 3. Scanner Motor connector is disconnected. 4. Scanner Motor is defective. 5. Scanning Mechanism is defective. 6. SPC PCB connector is disconnected. 7. SPC PCB is defective. 8. LVPS is defective. 1. Engine PCB connector is disconnected. 2. Engine PCB is defective. 3. Laser Unit is defective. 4. LVPS connectors is disconnected. 5. LVPS is defective. 6. SC PCB is defective. 1. Scanning Lamp connector is disconnected. 2. Scanning Lamp is defective. 3. SPC PCB connector is disconnected. 4. SPC PCB is defective. 5. SC PCB is defective.
E2: Lift DC Motor Error Code Function E2 Not Applicable Check Points E3: Development System Error Check Points 1. Drive Mechanism is defective. 2. Main Motor connector is disconnected. 3. Main Motor is defective. 4. Engine PCB connector is disconnected. 5. Engine PCB is defective. 6. LVPS is defective. E4: Fuser Unit Error Code Function E4- 01 Fuser Warm-up Temperature Check Points 1. Fuser Thermistor is dirty. 2. Thermistor position is incorrect. 3. Fuser temperature is low. 4. Thermistor is defective. 5. Fuser Lamp connector is disconnected. 6. Fuser Thermostat is defective. 7. Fuser Lamp is defective. 8. Engine PCB connector is disconnected. 9. Engine PCB is defective.
128
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
E4: Fuser Unit Error Code Function E4- 10 Exhaust Fan Motor Rotation (Fuser Unit Side) Check Points 1. Exhaust Fan connector is disconnected. 2. Exhaust Fan is defective. 3. LVPS connector is disconnected. 4. LVPS is defective. 5. Engine PCB is defective. E5: System Error Code Function E5- 05 SPC Firmware Failure E5- 11 Thermistor, Toner Sensor E5- 12 Main CPU/SPC Interface Error Check Points 1. SPC PCB is defective. 1. SC/Engine PCB connector is disconnected. 2. SC/Engine PCB is defective. 1. SC/SPC PCB connector is disconnected. 2. SC/SPC PCB is defective.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
E7: Optional Unit Error Code Function E7- 90 Hardware Key Abnormal Check Points 1. Incorrect Hardware Key is installed. 2. Hardware Key is defective.
E13: Low Toner or Out of Toner Code Function Check Points E13 TONER IS RUNNING LOW 1. Toner Cartridge is incorrectly installed. or 2. Out of Toner. OUT OF TONER 3. Low Toner Sensor is disconnected. 4. Low Toner Sensor is defective. 5. Engine PCB connector is disconnected. 6. Engine PCB is defective. Note: These error codes will appear only when the optional accessories are installed.
129
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
4.8.
Code 001 002 007
UF-9000 DP-180/190
008 010 011 012 017 030 031 041 043 045 060 061 400 XMT XMT COPY STANDBY RCV COPY STANDBY RCV COPY STANDBY XMT RCV COPY STANDBY RCV
Fax Information Codes Phase Description of Problem Cause C, D Leading edge of the recording Recording paper jam. paper fails to reach the Timing Timing Sensor abnormal. Sensor. (1st Tray) C, D Leading edge of the recording Recording paper jam. paper fails to reach the Timing Timing Sensor abnormal. Sensor. (2nd Tray) C, D 1. Leading edge of the recording Recording paper jam. paper fails to reach the Paper Paper Exit Sensor abnormal. Exit Sensor. 2. Recording paper has not completely passed the Paper Exit Sensor. Paper Tray is opened while paper Paper Tray is opened. is feeding. B, C No recording paper. No recording paper or paper is not set properly. No Paper Sensor is defective. B, C Paper Tray is not installed Connector is not installed properly. properly. C, D The length of the received Transmitter Document Jam. document is over 2 m. Incorrect paper size loaded in the Paper size is incorrect. Paper Tray. B Read Point Sensor does not go Document is not set properly. ON within 10 seconds after the Defective Read Point Sensor. document starts feeding. C Transmitting document was longer The document may jam. than 2 meter (or 78.7 in). Defective Read Point Sensor. B, C, D Out of Toner. No toner. Defective Low Toner Sensor. B, C, D Low Toner. A A B No Toner Cartridge. Printer Cover is open. ADF Door is open. T1 timer (35 5 sec.) elapsed without detecting 300 bps signal. Toner is getting low. Defective Low Toner Sensor. Toner Cartridge has not been installed. Defective Toner Cartridge Sensor. Cover is not firmly closed. Connectors are not firmly connected. Door is not firmly closed. Connectors are not firmly connected. Incorrect number was dialed and the START button was pushed. Telephone line was disconnected while dialing. SC PCB (Modem) or MJR PCB are defective. Receiver is defective. (It may only be transmitting CED)
130
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
Code 401
Mode XMT
402 403
404
405
XMT
406
407
408
XMT
409
XMT
410 411
412 414
Fax Information Codes Phase Description of Problem Cause B DCN was returned from receiver Your machine's ID Number is not while transmitter is waiting for CFR programmed. or FTT. Possible incompatibility or incorrect Password. B DCN was returned from receiver Receiver working in non-CCITT mode while transmitter is waiting for only. (Possible incompatibility) NSF/DIS. B Transmitter had no polling "POLLED=ON" (polling XMT ready) is function. not set at the transmitter. Document to be transmitted is not placed at the transmitter. B Transmitter sent NSS (or DCS) Receiver is defective. (Modem) followed by TCF three times, but SC PCB or FXB PCB are defective. the receiver did not respond. (CFR Receiver disconnects line during first or FTT is usually returned) NSS (or DCS) is transmitted. B Transmitter received FTT after it Line quality is poor. (TCF is damaged transmitted TCF at 2400bps. due to line noise) Received RTN after Receiver is defective. (Modem, etc.) communicating at 2400 bps. SC PCB or FXB PCB are defective. B XMT-Password mismatched. XMT, RCV password does not match. RCV-Password mismatched. Last 4 digits of TSI does not match with Selective RCV incomplete. the last 4 digits of ONE-TOUCH, ABBR telephone number. D Transmitter received no response Receiver is defective. (No paper, paper after it transmitted post message, jamming, etc.) such as EOP, MPS, EOM, etc...or Receiver ceased receiving because of received DCN. excessive error. (Line quality is poor) SC PCB or FXB PCB are defective. D Transmitter received RTN after it Receiver receives data with error. (Line transmitted EOP, MPS, or EOM. quality is poor) Receiver is defective. (Modem, etc.) SC PCB or FXB PCB are defective. D Transmitter receives PIN after it Receiver receives data with error due to transmitted a post message, such poor line quality, and receiving operator as EOP, MPS, EOM, etc. requests voice contact. Receiver is defective. (Modem, etc.) SC PCB or FXB PCB are defective. D Received DCN while waiting for Interface or line is faulty. post command. (EOP, MPS, EOM, Transmitter is defective. etc.) B Received DCN after transmitting Transmitter is not ready for polling NSC. communication. Password does not match between transmitter and receiver. B, D No response within 12 seconds in Transmitter is defective. NSS/DCS/MPS wait state. (After SC PCB is defective. transmitting FTT) B No response received after Password does not match between transmitting 3rd NSC. transmitter and receiver. Transmitter is defective. (No original, document jam, etc.)
UF-9000 DP-180/190
131
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
417 418
420
495
Fax Information Codes Mode Phase Description of Problem Cause XMT B Remote side attempted to receive Inform the remote side that your (Polling) message from your machine in machine does not have the polling polling communication. transmission feature. RCV D Receiver did not detect post Transmitter is defective. command, such as EOP, MPS, Line quality is poor. (RTC signal is EOM, etc. distorted due to line noise) SC PCB or FXB PCB are defective. RCV C Receiver returned RTN in Line quality is poor. (There are response to post message. excessive errors in received data) SC PCB or FXB PCB are defective. RCV C Receiver transmitted PIN in Line quality is poor. (There are response to PRI-Q from excessive errors in received data) transmitter. (Transmitting operator SC PCB or FXB PCB are defective. requests voice contact) RCV B T1 timer (35 sec.) elapsed without Incorrect incoming call type (voice). detecting 300 bps signal. (Non-facsimile communication) Transmitter is defective. SC PCB or FXB PCB are defective. RCV B Busy Tone is detected after Remote station disconnected the line. sending NSF Signal. Wrong number is dialed. XMT B Content of NSF (or DIS) or NSC There is an incompatibility. (or DTC) was invalid. G3 B DCN received to NSF/CSI/DIS The interface is incompatible. RCV transmitted. XMT or RCV B CD (response from Modem) did Remote unit is defective. not turn OFF within 180 sec. after SC PCB or FXB PCB are defective. receiver detected FLAG signal. G3 RX C DCN received after transmitting Transmitter is defective or incompatible. FTT. Line quality is poor. RCV B Received relay transfer request or confidential document to distribute to an end receiving station or all confidential mailboxes are used. RELAY XMT B Remote unit does not have CONF. XMT/ Relayed XMT or Confidential POLL Comm. capability. RCV C Failed training in Phase C. Line quality is poor. (Training signal is distorted due to line noise) SC PCB or FXB PCB are defective. RCV C Sum of error lines exceeded the Line quality is poor. limit (Function Parameter No. 70) SC PCB or FXB PCB are defective. of 64 lines. RCV C Interval between two EOLs was Transmitter is defective. more than 10 sec. when receiver Line quality is poor. (EOL is damaged received message data. due to line noise) SC PCB or FXB PCB are defective. XMT C During reception, CD turned OFF Line is disconnected. RCV or continued ON for long time. Transmitter is defective. During communication, lost loop - SC PCB or FXB PCB are defective. current.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
132
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
Mode XMT XMT/ RCV(V.34) XMT/ RCV(V.34) XMT/ RCV(V.34) RCV/V.34 (Polling) XMT/V.34 (Polling) XMT ECM XMT ECM XMT ECM XMT ECM XMT ECM RCV ECM RCV ECM RCV ECM RCV XMT XMT XMT XMT XMT XMT
503 504 505 540 541 542 543 544 550 554 555 570 571 580 581 582 601 623
Fax Information Codes Phase Description of Problem Cause C CS of modem is not able to turn FXB PCB is defective. ON. B Remote unit does not have compatible Modem. B, C, D During reception, CD turned OFF Line is disconnected. or continued ON for long time. Transmitter is defective. During communication, lost loop - SC PCB or FXB PCB are defective. current. B, C, D CS of modem is not able to turn FXB PCB is defective. ON during training. Line is disconnected. B Polling is rejected from the remote No polling original is set. station. B Polling XMT is rejected. No polling original is set. B D D D D C D D B B B B B No response after transmitting 3rd CTC or DCN received. No response after transmitting 3rd EOR or received DCN. No response to the 3rd RR transmitted or received DCN. T5 timer (60 sec.) elapsed without MCF. Stopped Transmission after EOR Transmission. Timer between frames in phase C has elapsed. Transmitted ERR after receiving EOR. Transmitted PIN after receiving EOR. Password or machine code did not match during remote diagnostic communication. Remote unit did not have the remote diagnostic function. Sub-address transmission to a unit that has their DIS bit 49 (NSF bit 155) OFF. Sub-address Password transmission to a unit that has their DIS bit 50 (NSF bit 156) OFF. Sub-address SEP (for Polling) transmission to a unit that has their DIS bit 47 (NSF bit 130) OFF. ADF Door was opened during ADF transmission. No original was in the ADF. (Builtin dialer engaged) Incompatible interface. Line is faulty. FXB PCB abnormal. Remote unit is abnormal. Remote unit is abnormal. Line is faulty. FXB PCB abnormal. Defective remote station. Line is faulty. Line is faulty and Operator Call requested by RX side.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Sub-address transmission to a unit that has no Sub-address function. Sub-address transmission to a unit that has no Sub-address function. Sub-address transmission to a unit that has no Sub-address function.
Operator removed the original from the ADF after dialing was completed. Original was not set properly in the ADF.
133
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
Code 630
631 634
715 716
717 718
719
720
Fax Information Codes Mode Phase Description of Problem Cause XMT or RCV B Redial count over. No dial tone detected. Sensor dial tone (Polling) is not detected. (destination dependent) Busy tone is detected. (destination dependent) T1 timer (35 5 sec.) elapsed without a signal from the receiver. XMT A "STOP" button was pressed during Auto Dialing. XMT B Redial count over with no Telephone line cable is disconnected. response or busy tone was not Wrong number is dialed. detected. SC or FXB PCB is abnormal. Note: U.S.A. and Canadian models will redial only once if a busy tone is not detected. XMT LAN Power turned Off with applicable Power switched off. data in memory or during Power failure occurred. communication. XMT PSTN Communication terminated by RCV LAN Operator pressing the "STOP" key. RCV LAN Incorrect LDAP settings. LDAP Server Name, LDAP Login Name, LDAP Password and/or LDAP Search Base are incorrect. XMT LAN Unknown email address replied Mail Server received an incorrect email from the Mail Server. address. (Dependent on Server's Mail application) XMT LAN LAN Interface error. The 10Base-T/100Base-TX cable is not RCV Cannot logon to the LAN. connected. An unexpected LAN problem occurred. Check the SC PCB connector. XMT LAN TCP/IP connection timed out. Incorrect IP Address is set. Verify the IP Address, Default Router IP Address, SMTP Server IP Address. XMT LAN Cannot logon to the LAN. Incorrect SMTP Server IP Address is set. No email application is activated on the Mail Server. XMT LAN Incomplete SMTP Protocol Mail Servers hard disk may be full. transmission. Mail Server is defective. XMT LAN Page Memory Overflow occurred Check the document size and while receiving printing data. The resolution. paper size selected within your Ask originator to re-send in a supported application to print is larger than size and resolution. the paper size loaded in the Tray(s). RCV LAN Received data via LAN is in a Ask the originator to re-send with a format that is not supported. supported file attachment: * In a TIFF-F format. * Image data conforming to A4/Letter size. POP LAN Unable to connect with the POP Incorrect POP Server address is set. Server. POP Server is down. 134
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
725 726 727 728 729 730 731 741 800 814
815 816
825 826
870
Fax Information Codes Mode Phase Description of Problem Cause POP LAN Unable to login to the POP Server. Incorrect User Name or Password is set. RCV LAN Failed to obtain the Network LAN Cable is disconnected. Parameters (such as: IP Address, DHCP is not available. Subnet Mask, Default Gateway IP (Contact the Network Administrator.) Address, etc.) from the DHCP server. XMT LAN DNS Server connection timed out. Incorrect DNS Server address is set. POP DNS Server is down. XMT LAN Received an error response from Incorrect POP Server address is set. POP the DNS Server. Incorrect SMTP Server address is set. XMT LAN Received an Error or No Remote Internet Fax Errors: Busy or Response from the Remote Job Number Overflow for Relay XMT. Internet Fax. (SMTP Direct XMT) (Retry is possible) XMT LAN Remote Internet Fax Errors: Memory Overflow or No Power. (Retry is not possible) XMT LAN Failed to authenticate (SMTP SMTP AUTHENTICATION, User Name AUTHENTICATION) when and/or Password are incorrect. connecting with the SMTP server. (Contact the Network Administrator.) RCV LAN Unable to program the Internet Verify that the Fax Parameter #158 is parameters or the autodialer with set to 2: Valid. Email from a PC. RCV LAN Dialer full while Relayed Dial buffer for manual number dialing Transmission Request was (70 stations) are being used. received. XMT, Polling PSTN Unable to dial Deleted the registered station name before dialing with Timer Controlled Communications, etc. Relay PSTN The machine was requested to Comm. relay a document but has no Relay Hub capability. Conf. XMT The remote station does not have Conf. Polling Relay XMT nor Confidential Relay Communication capability. Comm. Conf. RCV Mailbox is full. Conf. Polled "The received Polling Password did not match. The machine does not have Confidential Comm. capability." Conf. RCV Parameter settings of the initial Conf. Polled sending station are not properly set. Receiver side does not have correct RCV B If applicable sub-address is not registered in the phone book of the sub-address in their phone book. receiver side when using subaddressing function. MEM XMT PSTN Memory overflow occurred while Multi-Copy storing documents into memory.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
135
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
Code 879
RCV XMT
Fax Information Codes Phase Description of Problem Cause PSTN Memory overflow occurred during Memory overflow on the Fax side. substitute memory reception. LAN Memory overflow. Memory overflow on the Fax side. Mail Server sent a reset command Mail server aborted the download (Busy while downloading the data to the with other higher priority jobs). machine. File Access Error. File Access Error. LAN Memory file access error. SC PCB is defective. PSTN Memory file access error. SC PCB is defective. LAN Memory file access error. SC PCB is defective.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
136
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
4.9.
The 13-digit Diagnostic Code is provided for the service technician to analyze how the communication was performed. The code is recorded on the Journal. Journal Example
************* -JOURNAL- ************************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 09:39********
NO. COMM. PAGES 01 OK 001 FILE DURATION X/R 129 00:00'42 XMT IDENTIFICATION 123 456 789 DATE MMM-dd TIME 01:55
1st digit
UF-9000 DP-180/190
DIAGNOSTIC C8649003C0000
13th digit
- PANASONIC UF-9000/DP-180/190
1st Digit: Manufacturer Code -: Not used/defined Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Manufacturer Code Casio Canon Sanyo Sharp Tamura Toshiba NEC Oki Hitachi Xerox Fujitsu Matsushita Mitsubishi Murata Ricoh
Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
137
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
2nd Digit -: Not used/defined Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition ID (TSI, CSI, CIG) RTN DCN Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
STOP Button Pressed Pressed Pressed Pressed Pressed Pressed Pressed Pressed
3rd Digit -: Not used/defined Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Paper Width A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 -
Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
138
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
4th Digit -: Not used/defined Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Resolution Std Std Std Std Std Std Std Std Fine Fine Fine Fine Fine Fine Fine Fine
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Scanning Rate 20 ms/line 5 ms/line 10 ms/line 40 ms/line 0 ms/line 20 ms/line 5 ms/line 10 ms/line 40 ms/line 0 ms/line
Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Memory/ Deferred Comm. Dialing/RCV Non-Memory Manual Non-Memory Communication Used Manual Non-Memory Communication Auto Dialing Non-Memory Used Auto Dialing Non-Memory Auto RCV Non-Memory Used Auto RCV Non-Memory Remote RCV Non-Memory Used Remote RCV Non-Memory Memory Manual Communication Used Manual Memory Communication Auto Dialing Memory Used Auto Dialing Memory Auto RCV Memory Used Auto RCV Memory Remote RCV Memory Used Remote RCV Memory 139
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
6th Digit -: Not used/defined Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Polling Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes XMT/RCV RCV RCV XMT XMT RCV RCV XMT XMT RCV RCV XMT XMT RCV RCV XMT XMT Selective Comm. Off Off Off Off On On On On Off Off Off Off On On On On Password Comm. Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off On On On On On On On On
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
Sub-Address Comm. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Confidential Relayed Comm. Comm. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Turnaround Polling Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
140
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
8th Digit -: Not used/defined Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Cover Sheet XMT Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
Advanced Comm. Report XMT Check & Call Memory Transfer Report XMT Check & Call Memory Transfer -
9th Digit -: Not used/defined Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Standard/ NonStandard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Non-Standard Non-Standard Non-Standard Non-Standard Non-Standard Non-Standard Non-Standard Non-Standard
Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
Short Protocol B D -
141
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
10th Digit -: Not used/defined Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition ECM Yes Yes Yes -
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Symbol Rate (V.34) 2400 sr 2800 sr 3000 sr 3200 sr 3429 sr V.34 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -
142
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
12th Digit -: Not used/defined Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Modem Speed (V.34) 2400 bps 4800 bps 7200 bps 9600 bps 12000 bps 14400 bps 16800 bps 19200 bps 21600 bps 24000 bps 26400 bps 28800 bps 31200 bps 33600 bps -
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Modem Speed 2400 bps 4800 bps 7200 bps 9600 bps TC 7200 bps TC 9600 bps 12000 bps 14400 bps -
Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
143
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
This section explains how to solve problems including error messages or unexpected printing results. If the Printing System is not printing or working as expected, and if you are not sure what to do, start your troubleshooting by checking the basics below: Ensure that the Ethernet LAN (10Base-T / 100Base-TX) Cable is connected properly Ensure that the Internet Parameters are correct Ensure that the Unit is turned On Ensure that the Paper is set properly in the Unit No error message is displayed on the Unit Try printing a test page from the printer driver properties dialog box
The character is not smooth. Fine line print cannot be obtained. Poor photograph print quality. Different character or symbol from the document is printed. The printer does not print anything or prints irregular images from the middle of the 1st page. Printing is exceedingly slow.
144
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Possible Solution(s) Check if the Panasonic Device is turned "On", and the 10Base-T/ is 100Base-TX cable properly connected. Printer Properties may be incorrectly configured. (i.e. Printer Port) The Panasonic Device may be processing someonefs print job, please wait, and try again later. The Panasonic Device is either Transmitting or Receiving an email. Verify and specify the paper size, or orientation to coincide with the application and the printer driver settings.
145
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
5 Service Modes
5.1. Service Modes (For Copier)
Service Mode Procedure
UF-9000 DP-180/190
These Service Modes are provided to assist the technician in checking for abnormalities in the copier and a means of making adjustments to the Input/Output of major components.
5.1.1.
1. To select the Service Mode The service mode is selected when FUNCTION, ORIGINAL SIZE and 3 keys are sequentially pressed, then F1 will appear in the display. 2. To exit the Service Mode The service mode is reset when the FUNCTION and CLEAR keys are pressed simultaneously.
5.1.2.
Item 00 CCD Test 01 LCD/LED Test 02 Page Memory Test 03 Print Test Pattern 1 04 Print Test Pattern 2 05 Print Test Pattern 3 06 Print Test Pattern 4
Function This test is used for checking the CCD. This test is used for checking the LCD and LEDs. This test is used for checking the Page Memory. Prints the pattern for setting the Paper position alignment. Prints the Slant pattern for setting the Paper position alignment. Prints the Grid pattern for setting the Paper position alignment. Prints the pattern for setting the Duplex Paper position alignment. One sheet is copied when the Start key is pressed. Multi copies are made when the Start key is pressed. The functioning of Input / Output items (selected item numbers) is checked. Various function settings (selected by code numbers) can be changed. Various function settings (selected by code numbers) can be adjusted. Electronic Counters for Maintenance Perform pseudo-operation of an item (selected by code numbers)
F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
Single Copy Test Continuous Copy Test Input / Output Status Test Function Parameters Adjust Parameters Electronic Counter Service Adjustment
146
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
Service Modes (For Copier) Service Item Mode F9 Unit 00 Fax Function Parameter Maintenance 01 Service Alert Tel # 02 Firmware Version 03 Print Device Info. 04 RAM Edit Mode 05 Serial Number 06 RAM Initialize 07 Firmware Update 08 Program Backup 09 Update Prog. Card 10 11 12 13 14 Program Copy Parameter Backup Parameter Restore Page Memory Size Sort Memory Size Function
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Displays the contact number when a machine malfunction occurs. Displays the firmware version for SC, SC Boot, PNL, SPC, Fax Option, Slot 1. F5/F6 Parameter, Machine / Counter / System Address / RAM Address infomations. Relative / Absolute Address. Registration of Serial Number for Maintenance. Each RAM date clear. Except F5, F6 Settings - refer to F6-99 "F5/F6 Initialization" Updates the firmware in the machine Firmware Card or the USB. Refer to Sect. 3.5. Creates a Master Firmware Card using the Firmware Update Kit. Configuration for Program copy. Backup the Parameter. Restore the Parameter. Displays the page memory size (MB). Displays the sort memory size (MB).
147
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
F5-00 F5-01 F5-02 F5-03 F5-04 F5-05 F5-06 F5-07 F5-08 F5-09 F5-10 F5-11 F5-12 F5-13 F5-14 F5-15 F5-16 F5-17 F5-18 F5-19
. . . . . Frequency desired . . . . . . . . . . LSU off timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exit Tray Limitation . . . . . . . . . . Paper out Indicator Paper size (Tray1) Paper size (Tray2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
60Hz
5 Sec.
F5-50 F5-51 F5-52 F5-53 F5-54 F5-55 F5-56 F5-57 F5-58 F5-59 F5-60 F5-61 F5-62 F5-63 F5-64 F5-65 F5-66 F5-67 F5-68 F5-69
Auto contrast adj. Dept. Counter (COPY) Dept. Counter (FAX) 2-sided auto shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ope.add toner alarm Auto Tray selection . . . . . . . . . . U13 clear Dept. Counter (SCAN) Dept. Counter (PRINT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reduce N in 1 space
Yes No No No
Stop Yes
None
On Letter-R Letter-R
Any keys No No
No 85K
Auto
148
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
: UF-9000 : 080023016C81 :
: : : : : : : :
: 32 MB : 16 MB : 2 MB
: : : :
No No No No
: 503
NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT -------------------------------------------------------------------------------01 MMM-dd-yyyy 11:11 J97 XX-00000008 02 MMM-dd-yyyy 11:31 J44 XX-00000140 (See Remarks) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-PANASONIC
******************************* - ***** -
0001- *********
Remarks: XX-00000140
149
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
147 90 0
28 73 0 26 26 61 18 59 180 0 3 24 27 21
F7-21 Copy Rint Count F7-22 Copy Scan Count F7-23 PC Rint Count F7-24 PC Scan Count F7-24 Fax Transmit Count F7-24 Fax Receive Count F7-24 Fax Print Count Serial Number :
150
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
5.1.3.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Set the machine to service mode and press "4" key on the Keypad. Press the "START" key. Select 1:Check Input or 2:Check Output to activate the test then press "START" key. Press "STOP" key to cancel the test. When the CLEAR key is pressed, the selected code input will not be accepted. Press FUNCTION and CLEAR keys simultaneously to exit the service mode. 1. Check Input F4 Mode (Check Input) Message Display Condition 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Home position is 1 detected. ADF Cover is open. 1
No.
Function
Remarks
2. Check Output Press the "START" key to start and press the "STOP" key to reset. F4 Mode (Check Output) Function When SPC PCB P103-8, Inverter CN1-2 signal level changes to 0V from Open, Lamp operates.
Item
151
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
5.1.4.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Set the machine to Service Mode and press "5" key on the Keypad. Press the "START" key. Enter the desired code number or press V, /\ arrow keys. Press the "SET" key. Enter the desired function code number and press SET key. When the CLEAR key is pressed, the selected code input will not be accepted. Press STOP key, then press FUNCTION and CLEAR keys simultaneously to exit the service mode. Reboot the machine after setting the parameter(s) to activate the setting(s). F5 Mode Function 0 : Auto 1 : 50 Hz 2 : 60Hz 1 : 5 sec. 2 : 10 sec. 3 : 15 sec. 4 : 20 sec. 6 : 30 sec. 8 : 40 sec. 10 : 50 sec. 12 : 60 sec. 0 : None 1 : Accumulate 2 : Job 0 : Off 1 : User (Displays Replace Drum) 2 : Service (Enables Check & Call function) 0 : On 1 : Off 4 : A4-R 12 : LEGAL 14 : LETTER-R 4 : A4-R 6 : B5-R 8 : A5-R 12 : LEGAL 14 : LETTER-R
No. 00 01
05-09 Not Used 10 Exit Tray Limitation (Up to 150 Sheets) 11 Replace Drum (Except USA / Canada) Not Used Paper Out Red Indicator Paper Size (Tray 1) (UF-9000) Paper Size (Tray 1) (DP-180/190)
0 (Effective from June 2004 Production) 1 (for Others) 2 (for Germany) (Effective from Oct. 2004 Production) 0
12 13 14
152
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
No. 15
F5 Mode Function 4 : A4-R 12 : LEGAL 14 : LETTER-R 4 : A4-R 6 : B5-R 12 : LEGAL 14 : LETTER-R 0 : No 1 : Auto 0 : No 1 : 1 to 2 2 : 2 to 2 0 : No 2 : LGL 0 : At feed 1 : At exit 0 : No 2 : DEPT. Same as F5-41 0 : No 1 : Yes 0 : No 1 : Yes 0 : No 1 : Yes 0 : Stop 1 : Continue 0 : No 1 : Yes 0 : Any keys 1 : Func + 1 0 : No 1 : Yes 0 : No 1 : Yes 0 : No 1 : Yes
UF-9000 DP-180/190
16-19 Not Used 20 ADF 21-37 Not Used 38 Duplex Mode Default (UF-9000) 39 40 41 42 Not Used Double Count Count Up Timing KEY/DEPT. Counter
0 : UF-9000/DP-190 1 2 0 1 0 0
43 Key Counter Timing 44-49 Not Used 50 Auto Contrast Adjust 51 52 Dept. Counter (COPY) Dept. Counter (FAX)
53-58 Not Used 59 Oper. Add Toner Alarm 60 Auto Tray Selection
0 1
61-62 Not Used 63 U13 Clear (DP-180/190 only) 64 Dept. Counter (SCANNER) 65 Dept. Counter (PRINTER)
0 0 0
153
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
No. 70
Item PM Cycle
F5 Mode Function 0 : No 1 : 1.5 K 2 : 2.5 K 3: 5K 4 : 10 K 5 : 15 K 6 : 20 K 7 : 30 K 8 : 40 K 9 : 60 K 10 : 85 K* 11 : 90 K 12 : 120 K 13 : 150 K 14 : 200 K 15 : 240 K 0 : Error Diffusion 1 : Dither 4 : A4-R 5 : B5 7 : A5 9 : FLS1 10 : FLS2 12 : LEGAL 14 : LETTER-R 1 : FLS1 2 : FLS2 0 : Off 1 : On 0:S>C>B 1:C>S>B 0 : No 1 : Yes 0 : No 1 : 40 K 2 : 60 K 3 : 120 K 4 : 240 K 5 : 360 K 6 : 480 K 7 : 600 K 0 : No 1 : 40 K 2 : 60 K 3 : 120 K 4 : 240 K 5 : 360 K 6 : 480 K 7 : 600 K
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Default Setting
0 (for UF-9000) Effective from April 2004 Production 10 (for DP-180/190) * Effective from June 2004 Production
81 82 83 84 85 86
Foolscap Size Not Used Digital Skyshot Mode Paper Tray Priority Side Void Setting (ADF) PM Cycle (Optics)
0 0 0 0
87
PM Cycle (ADF)
154
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
No. 88 89
F5 Mode Function 0 : Off 1 : Once 2 : On 0 : Auto 1 : 10 Half 2 : 10 Full 3 : 100 Half 4 : 100 Full 0 : Off 1 : Soft 2 : Loud 0 : Japan 1 : USA/CAN 2 : Europe 3 : Other 0 0
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Default Setting
90
Beep Sound
91-94 Not Used 95 Paper Size (FA) (Factory use only) 96-97 Not Used
155
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
5.1.5.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Set the machine to Service Mode and press "6" key on the Keypad. Press the "START" key. Enter the desired code number or press V, /\ arrow keys. Press the "SET" key. Enter the desired function code number and press SET key. When the CLEAR key is pressed, the selected code input will not be accepted. Press STOP key, then press FUNCTION and CLEAR keys simultaneously to exit the service mode. Reboot the machine after setting the parameter(s) to activate the setting(s). Note: 1. The Factory Setting is different in each model. 2. The machine may accept a (+/-) input value that exceeds the specified Setting Range for the parameters in the table; however, the actual registered value will not exceed the Upper/Lower Limitation value. F6 Mode No. Item Remarks Adjustment of platen original registration detection timing. Delay time is adjusted from registration roller clutch ON. Registration void should be adjusted. Adjustment of trail edge void. Adjustment of trail edge void. Adjustment of LSU side-side (Sheet Bypass). Adjustment of LSU side-side (1st Tray). Adjustment of LSU side-side (2nd Tray). Setting Range -30 - +30 0.2mm -50 - +16 0.5mm 0 - +99 0.5mm -9 - 0 0.5mm -9 - +15 0.5mm -8 - +7 0.5mm -8 - +7 0.5mm -8 - +7 0.5mm -8 - +7 0.5mm -99 - +99 (Read only) -99 - +99 (Read only)
05-06 Not Used 07 Registration Void 08 09 10 11 12 Trail Edge Read Timing Trail Edge Print Timing Side Adjust (Bypass) Side Adjust (Tray 1) Side Adjust (Tray 2)
13-15 Not Used 16 Side Adjust (ADU) 17-32 Not Used 33 TDC Max. Read Only 34 TDC Min. Read Only
Set by Digital QUANTUM (QUARC) control Set by Digital QUANTUM (QUARC) control
156
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
F6 Mode No. 35 Item TDC Avg. Read Only Remarks Set by Digital QUANTUM (QUARC) control
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Setting Range -99 - +99 (Read only) -32 - +32 -77 - +76 0.15uA -99 - +99
36-38 Not Used 39 LSU Unit PWM Adjust 40 Trans Current Side 1 41-43 Not Used 44 FAX Laser Duty Adj 45 46 Not Used PRINTER Laser Duty Adj
Printer Density Adjustment for FAX. (-) : Darker. (+) : Lighter. Printer Density Adjustment for Printer. (-) : Darker. (+) : Lighter. Image density adjustment for Text mode. (-) : Darker. (+) : Lighter. Image density adjustment for Text/ Photo mode. (-) : Darker. (+) : Lighter. Image density adjustment for Photo mode. (-) : Darker. (+) : Lighter. Adjustment of CCD read position. Adjustment of Contrast for Text Mode. Adjustment of Contrast for Text/Photo Mode. Adjustment of Contrast for Photo Mode. Adjustment of Lead Edge Read Point. Adjustment of Side Edge Read Point.
-99 - +99
51 52 53 54 55 56 57-62 63 64 65-66 67 68 69
PHOTO Image Density Not Used CCD Read Position TEXT Mode Contrast T/P Mode Contrast PHOTO Mode Contrast Not Used Lead Edge Read Timing Side Edge Read Adjust Not Used ADF Image Density Not Used Stamp Position Adjust
-99 - +99
-42 - +44 0.2mm -128 - +127 -128 - +127 -128 - +127 0 - +9 0.5mm 0 - +9 0.5mm -99 - +99 -50 - +50 0.3mm -2 - +2
70-78 Not Used 79 MTF Adjust 80-89 Not Used 90 ADF Image Read Start
Adjustment of Scanning Sharpness by digital image processing for Text /Photo Copy Mode. Adjustment of ADF horizontal image read start position.
157
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
F6 Mode No. 91 92 Item Original Lead ADF Original Trail ADF Remarks Adjustment of original detection timing. Adjustment of trail edge detection timing.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
5.1.6.
Set the machine to Service Mode and press "7" key on the Keypad. Press the "START" key. Enter the desired code number or press V, /\ arrow keys. Press the "SET" key. Enter the desired function code number and press SET key. When the CLEAR key is pressed, the selected code input will not be accepted. Press STOP key, then press FUNCTION and CLEAR keys simultaneously to exit the service mode. Reboot the machine after setting the parameter(s) to activate the setting(s). F7 Mode No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09-10 11 12 13 14-15 16 17 18 Item Key Operator ID Code Total Count PM Count Scanner PM Count Not Used OPC Drum Count Process Unit Count ADF PM Count Not Used Sheet Bypass Count 1st Paper Tray Count 2nd Paper Tray Count Not Used 2-sided Count ADF Count ADF Read Count Remarks Key Operators identification code for access to the counter mode. Total count for all copies / prints. Preventive Maintenance count. PM count for scanner readings. PM count of recording paper fed through the OPC Drum. PM count of recording paper fed through the Process Unit. PM count of originals fed through the ADF. Total count of paper fed from the sheet bypass. Total count of paper fed from the 1st paper tray. Total count of paper fed from the 2nd paper tray. Total count of 2-sided Print. Total count of originals fed through the ADF. Total count of originals scanned through the ADF.
158
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
F7 Mode No. 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28-29 30 31 32 99 Item Scanner Count Scanner Read Count Copy Print Count Copy Scan Count PC Print Count PC Scan Count Fax Transmit Count Fax Receive Count Fax Print Count Not Used A4R / LETTER R Count Not Used FLS / LEGAL Count All Counter Clear Remarks Total count of scanning operations. Total count of scanner readings. Total count of copies printed. Total count of copies scanned. Total count printed from PC. Total count scanned to PC. Total count of Fax transmitted. Total count of Fax received. Total count of Fax printed. Total count of A4-R / Letter-R Print. Total count of FLS / Legal Print. All counters are cleared.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
5.1.7.
Set the machine to Service Mode and press "8" key on the Keypad. Press the "START" key. Enter the desired code number or press V, /\ arrow keys. Press the "SET" key. Enter the desired function code number and press SET key. Press STOP key, then press FUNCTION and CLEAR keys simultaneously to exit the service mode. Reboot the machine after setting the parameter(s) to activate the setting(s). F8 Mode No. 00-05 Not Used 06 Error Log View Item Remarks a) Each time the arrow key is pressed, the machine errors or paper jam codes stored in memory are displayed, beginning with the oldest code. Note: Only the 30 most recent codes are displayed. a) Press the Reset key. A Message "Error code can be cleared with the Start key" is displayed on the LCD.* b) Press the Start key. Lock operation for Scanner Unit. Print out the Test Pattern. Proceed when the LSU is replaced.
07
08 (Factory use only) 09-17 Not Used 18 C18 PRT PWM ADJ.PTN. (LSU PWM Pattern)
159
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Remarks a) Press the Start key to move the mirror unit to the locked position for transporting the copier. b) When the mirror unit is locked, the machine will not accept any numerical key input. Note: The locking operation is automatically reset when the Power switch is turned ON again. Place the document on the ADF first. Press START key to begin. Press START key to begin. Press STOP key to finish.
20-46 Not Used 47 C47 ADF Scan Test 48 C48 Book Scan Test
160
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
5.1.8.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Set the machine to Service Mode and press "9" key on the Keypad. Press the "START" key. Enter the desired code number or press V, /\ arrow keys. Press the "SET" key. Enter the desired function code number and press SET key. When the CLEAR key is pressed, the selected code input will not be accepted. Press STOP key, then press FUNCTION and CLEAR keys simultaneously to exit the service mode. Reboot the machine after setting the parameter(s) to activate the setting(s). F9 Mode Service Item Mode F9 Unit 00 Fax Function Parameter Maintenance 01 Service Alert Tel # 02 Firmware Version 00 SC 01 SC Boot 02 03 04 05 PNL SPC (Scanner) Printer FAX Modem Remarks Displays the contact number when a machine malfunction occurs. Displays the firmware version for SC. Displays the firmware version for SC Boot. Displays the firmware version for PNL. Displays the firmware version for SPC. Displays the firmware version. Displays the firmware version for FAX Option 1.
Displays the firmware version for Slot 1. 03 Print Prints the memory contents of the F5 Device Info. and F6 modes. 01 Machine Information Prints the machine setup information list. 02 Counter Information Prints the Counter information list. 03 System Address Prints the system memory setting. Info. 04 RAM Address Prints the RAM data dump list. Information 04 RAM Edit 1 Relative Address Setting of Relative address. Mode 2 Absolute Address Setting of Real address. 05 Serial Number Registration of Serial Number for Maintenance. Clears by Shipment Set.
161
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
F9 Mode Service Mode F9 Unit 06 Maintenance Item RAM Initialize 00 Parameter Initialize Remarks
UF-9000 DP-180/190
07
08
09
10
11 12 13 14
Resets the Fax and Function parameters to default values. 01 All Job Clear Clears all Jobs stored in Flash Memory. 02 LBP Error Log Clear Clears LBP Error log 03 Shipment Set Clears All Jobs, All Preset Data, Parameter Initialize & Resets the Counters (Fax). 04 LBP Fuser Reset Clears the LBP fuser error. 05 Dept. Counter Clear Firmware 00 Update FROM Card Updates the firmware in the machine Update with the Master Firmware Card. 01 Update from USB Updates the firmware in the machine with the USB. Program 00 Main Onboard F-ROM 4MB Backup 01 Option 1 all Slot 1 FRM8 PCB 8MB (Refer to 02 Option 1 a Slot 1 FRM8 PCB 4MB (a) Sect. 3.5.) 03 Option 1 b Slot 1 FRM8 PCB 4MB (b) 04 Not Used Slot 2 FRM8 PCB 8MB 05 Not Used Slot 2 FRM8 PCB 4MB (a) 06 Not Used Slot 2 FRM8 PCB 4MB (b) Update Prog. Card Creates a Master Firmware Card using the Firmware Update Kit. A 4MB or 8MB Flash Memory Card will be required depending upon the model. Program 00 From card to slot 1 Configuration for Program copy. Copy 01 From card to slot 2 02 From slot 1 to card 03 From slot 1 to slot 2 04 From slot 2 to card 05 From slot 2 to slot 1 Parameter Backup Backup the Parameter. Parameter Restore Restore the Parameter. Page Memory Size Displays the page memory size (MB). Sort Memory Size Displays the sort memory size (MB).
162
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
5.2.
5.2.1.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
1. To enter the Fax Service Mode a. Press FAX/EMAIL key. b. Press FUNCTION and then 7 keys. c. Press MONITOR four times, then press *. d. Enter the desired code number or press the V, /\ arrow keys. 2. To exit the Fax Service Mode Press STOP key. Note: The following buttons provide these functions in the Service Mode: "START" "V" "/\" : : : The new setting value is stored in the machine. Scroll the function parameter number down. Scroll the function parameter number up.
5.2.2.
The following service modes are provided to assist you in setting operational functions of the unit and determining the condition of the unit. Service Modes (For Facsimile) Description Allows changes to the function parameters (the home position, etc.). Factory use only. Prints the Function Parameter List, Page Memory Test, Printer Report, All Document File, Protocol Trace and Toner Order Form. Generates various binary, tonal and DTMF signals, by the modem. Initialize RAM and restore the default value of the function parameters. Note: Turn the Power Switch to the OFF and back to the ON position to enable the parameter settings. Allows input of information for Service Alert Report, Maintenance Alert Report and Toner Order Form. Used for Firmware Update, Firmware Backup, Parameter Restore, Parameter Backup, Transferring Firmware from the PC to the Flash Card and Sending a Received File during a fatal printer error.
No. 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
RAM Edit Mode Print Parameter List / Report Modem Tests Not Used RAM Initialize
07 08 09
163
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
No. 10
Service Modes (For Facsimile) Service Mode Description Firmware 00 SC Displays the firmware version for SC. Version 01 SC Boot Displays the firmware version for SC Boot. 02 PNL Displays the firmware version for PNL. 03 SPC (Scanner) Displays the firmware version for SPC. 04 Not Used 05 FAX Modem Displays the firmware version for FAX. 06 Not Used 07 SC2 Displays the firmware version for Slot 1.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
164
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
5.2.3.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Enter the desired code number and press START key. If you wish to select another code number, scroll the menu with the V, /\ arrow keys. Select the desired function code and press the "START" key. When the CLEAR key is pressed, the selected code input will not be accepted. Press STOP key, then press FUNCTION and CLEAR keys simultaneously to exit the service mode. Function Parameter Table Selections Function 1 = Monitor Selects whether the machine starts to TX automatically during On-Hook dialing. 2 = Tel/Dial Monitor : Start to TX after pressing START TEL/DIAL : Start to TX automatically 1 = Off Selects the No Paper or No Toner alarm status. 2 = Timer OFF : Alarm is disabled. 3 = Constant Timer : Alarm will shut off after 6 seconds. Constant : Alarm will not stop until "STOP" is pressed or the error is cleared/ corrected. 1 = Off Selects whether the machine prompts to print the 2 = On COMM. Journal when the printout condition is set to INC and STOP is pressed during communication. 1 = Off Selects whether the Continuous Polling feature is 2 = Stn (Tx only) enabled. 3 = Hub (Rx only) Stn : Place the document(s) on the ADF or Platen, then press the assigned Program Key to store or add the documents into a polled file. (See Note 1) Hub : When the polling command is initiated, the machine will continuously poll originals from the remote stations until it is interrupted by pressing "STOP". 1 = Off (will not accept) Selects whether the machine accepts and allows to 2 = On (accepts) set or change the Numeric ID.
165
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
No. 005
Function Parameter Table Parameter Selections Function 000 : Austria Destination Code Specified destinations only. (DP-180/190 only) 001 : U.K. 002 : Canada 003 : Denmark 004 : Taiwan 005 : Finland 006 : Germany 007 : Netherlands 008 : Italy 009 : Spanish 010 : Hong Kong 011 : Australia 012 : Switzerland 013 : Norway 015 : Portuguese 016 : Ireland 017 : Belgium 018 : Sweden 019 : Turkey 020 : U.S.A. 021 : France 022 : New Zealand 025 : Japan 029 : Poland 030 : Czech 031 : Russia 032 : Greece 033 : Hungary 034 : Indonesia 035 : South Korea 038 : Malaysia 039 : China 045 : Thailand 048 : South Africa 049 : Singapore 050 : Universal 051 : East Euro 999 : Initialize ID Display 1 = Number (Numeric ID) Selects the priority of displaying the ID. 2 = Chara (Character ID) JRNL Column 1 = Station Selects the contents of the ID to display on the 2 = RCVD ID Journal. Monitor 1 = Off Selects whether the Monitor is ON/OFF for 2 = On monitoring fax signals. (FOR SERVICE USE ONLY) DC Loop 1 = Off (Normal) Selects a false Off Hook state for back to back 2 = On (Off Hook) communication test. TX Level 00 = 0 dBm Selects the TX signal output level, 0 to -15 dBm in 1 ~ dBm steps. 15 = -15 dBm
UF-9000 DP-180/190
166
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
014 G3 TX EQL
Function Parameter Table Selections Function 1 = -43 dBm Selects the receiving sensitivity of -33/-38/-43/-48 2 = -38 dBm dBm. 3 = -33 dBm 4 = -48 dBm 00 = 0 dBm Selects the DTMF output level, 0 to -15 dBm in 1 ~ dBm steps. 15 = -15 dBm 1 = 0dB Selects the cable equalizer for G3 reception mode, 2 = 4dB 0dB, 4dB, 8dB or 12dB. 3 = 8dB 4 = 12dB 1 = 0dB Selects the cable equalizer for G3 transmission 2 = 4dB mode, 0dB, 4dB, 8dB or 12dB. 3 = 8dB 4 = 12dB
UF-9000 DP-180/190
2400 bps 4800 bps 7200 bps 9600 bps TC7200 bps TC9600 bps 12000 bps 14400 bps 2400 bps 4800 bps 7200 bps 9600 bps TC7200 bps TC9600 bps 12000 bps 14400 bps 1 = Off 2 = On 3 = Select 1 = Off (Invalid) 2 = On (Valid) 1 = Off (without EP Tone) 2 = On (with EP Tone)
018 RX Start
Selects the transmission modem start speed, 14400/12000/TC9600/TC7200/9600/7200/4800/ 2400 bps. Press V or /\ to select the symbol rate. Note: This parameter is applicable only when communicating with regular G3 machines. When communicating with Super G3 (V.34) machines, use Parameter No. 32. Selects the reception modem start speed, 14400/ 12000/TC9600/TC7200/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps. Press V or /\ to select the symbol rate. Note: This parameter is applicable only when communicating with regular G3 machines. When communicating with Super G3 (V.34) machines, use Parameter No. 33. Selects whether the ITU-T V.34 is Off, On or Select. Select: Select whether the ITU-T V.34 is Off or On, when entering Phone Book Dialing Numbers or Manual Number Dialing. Select the ECM mode. Selects whether to add the echo protect tone on V.29 mode. (Used when Echo Suppression is disabled.) On : Add Off : Do not add Selects the time interval between the receiving signal and the transmitting signal. Selects the TCF check interval Long/Short Selects the CED frequency 2100/1080 Hz
1 = 100 ms 2 = 200 ms 3 = 500 ms 1 = Normal (Short) 2 = Long 1 = 1080 Hz (non ITU-T) 2 = 2100 Hz
167
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
No. Parameter 025 COMM. Start-Up 026 Non-Standard 027 Short Protocol B 028 Short Protocol D 029 Remote Diagnostics 030 CED & 300 bps 031 RTC = EOL x 12 032 V34 TX Start 033 V34 RX Start 034 V34 TX SR 035 V34 RX SR 036 Not Used 037 Protocol Display 038 Not Used 039 Flash Time 040 Flash Time (PSTN) 041 Pause Time 042 Not Used 043 Redial Interval
Function Parameter Table Selections Function 1 = First Selects the communication start-up condition (XMT 2 = Second and Polling). (Used when Echo Suppression is disabled.) 1 = Off (Invalid) Selects own mode (Panafax mode). 2 = On (Valid) 1 = Off (Invalid) Selects the short protocol mode. 2 = On (Valid) 1 = Off (Invalid) Selects the short protocol mode. When activated, it 2 = On (Valid) allows the machine to automatically store the modem speed for each Auto Dial Number. 1 = Off (will not accept) Selects whether the machine accepts Remote 2 = On (accepts) Diagnostics from the service station. 1 = 75 ms Selects the pause interval between the CED and 2 = 1 sec the 300 bps signal. (Used when Echo Suppression is disabled.) 1 = Off (EOLx6) Selects the RTC signal, EOLx6 or EOLx12. 2 = On (EOLx12) 2400-33600bps Selects the transmission modem start speed for V.34 communication, 33600-2400 bps. Press V or /\ to select the symbol rate. 2400-33600bps Selects the receiving modem start speed for V.34 communication, 33600-2400 bps. Press V or /\ to select the symbol rate. 2400-3429sr Selects the transmission symbol rate for V.34, 3429/ 3200/3000/2800/2400 sr. Press V or /\ to select the symbol rate. 2400-3429sr Selects receiving symbol rate for V.34, 3429/3200/ 3000/2800/2400 sr. Press V or /\ to select the symbol rate. 1 = Off (not displayed) 2 = On (displayed) Selects whether to display the modem speed during communication. (Press the Job Status Key to display) Selects the pause interval before activating the Flash key. Selects the pause interval before activating the Flash key. (For Germany, Austria and Czech) Selects the pause interval from 1 sec. ~ 10 sec. for dialing through a switchboard or for international calls. Selects the redial interval from 0 to 15 minutes in 1 minute steps.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
168
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
045 Ring Detect Count 046 On-Hook Time 047 Response Wait Interval
Function Parameter Table Selections Function 0 = no redial Selects the redial count from 0 to 15 times in 1 step ~ intervals. 15 = 15 times Note: In order to comply with the requirements TBR21 in the EC countries, do not select 15 times. 0 ~ 9 (For Australia Only) 1 = 1 ring Selects the ring detection count from 1 to 9 rings in ~ 1 ring step intervals. 9 = 9 rings 0 = 0 sec. Selects the on-hook time between sequential ~ communication calls in 1 second step intervals. 90 = 90 sec. 1 = 1 sec. Selects the waiting interval for the response after ~ completing the dialing. 90 = 90 sec. 20 ~ 150 sec. (For France Only)
UF-9000 DP-180/190
048~ Not Used 049 050 Ring Detect Mode 1 = Normal 2 = Rough 051 Not Used 052 Pulse Rate
Selects the quality of ringer detection. Use if the line signal is out of regulation, set to "Rough" so that the unit may detect the ringing signals. Selects the dial pulse rate 10/20 pps.
1 = 10 pps 2 = 20 pps
053~ Not Used 054 055 Busy Tone Check 1 = Off 2 = On 056 Dial Tone Check 1 = Off (Specified 2 = On destinations only) 057 DC Loop Check 1 = Off (Specified 2 = On destinations only) 058 Comm. JRNL + 1 = Off (without image) Image 2 = On (with image) 059 Confidential RCV 1 = Off (does not print out) Report 2 = On (prints out) 060 Version Indicates the Host software version. 061 TX/RX/PRT/CPY TX:****** PRT:****** RX:****** CPY:****** 062 Print Counter 1 = Off 2 = On 063~ Not Used 067
Selects whether to detect the Busy Tone. Selects whether to detect Dial Tone before dialing the telephone number. Selects whether the unit checks the DC Loop during communication. Selects whether the machine prints the COMM. Journal with image. Selects whether the machine prints the Confidential RCV Report.
Displays the transmitted, received, total printed and copied document count. Selects whether to print in the Fax Parameter List, the counter information that is displayed in the Function Parameter No. 61.
169
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
No. Parameter 068 NYSE Fax Forward (USA and Canada Only)
069 NYSE Local Print (USA and Canada Only) 070 Line Error
076 Batch TX (USA and Canada Only) 077 RX JAM Length 1 = Off (unlimited) 2=2m 078~ Not Used 079 080 Doc Top Feed -99 ~ +99 081 Doc End Feed -90 ~ +127
Function Parameter Table Selections Function 1 = Off Selects whether the machine will forward the 2 = On incoming and outgoing faxes to a specified station. Note: Once this parameter is activated, Fax Forwarding via Fax Parameter 054 is automatically disabled, an Access Code of "0000" is automatically assigned and Fax Parameter 038 has a new setting added called "NYSE". 1 = Inc Selects the printing condition for the incoming faxes 2 = On (Always) after FAX Forwarding. INC. : Prints only if FAX Forwarding fails. ON : Always prints. 128 lines 1. Selects the line disconnect condition during 256 lines reception. If the number of line errors exceed this 512 lines setting, the unit will disconnect the line. 1024 line Press V or /\ to select the symbol rate. 2048 lines 2. Selects the transmit condition of RTP/PIP or Off RTN/PIN. (will not disconnect line) (Available if No.73 Error Detect is set to "LINES") (See Note 1) 1 = 5% Selects the transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/ 2 = 10% PIN. 3 = 15% (Available if No.73 Error Detect is set to "RATE".) 4 = 20% (See Note 2) 1 = Off (unlimited) Selects the continuous total error criteria of Off/3/6 2 = 3 lines/STD or 12 lines in Standard mode. If continuous total 3 = 6 lines/STD error exceeds this setting, the unit will transmit 4 = 12 lines/STD RTN/PIN. (Available if No.73 Error Detect is set to "RATE".) 1 = Lines Selects the error detect condition Lines/Rate. 2 = Rate 1 = Disconnect Selects whether to disconnect the phone line or 2 = Continue continue when "RTN" is received. 1 = MH (MH only) Selects the coding scheme. 2 = MR (MH or MR) 3 = MMR (MH or MR or MMR) 4 = JBIG 1 = Off Selects whether the batch transmission is available. 2 = On Selects the maximum length of a received document that can be printed.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Adjusts the distance between the scanning sensor ON position and the scanning start position. Adjusts the distance between the scanning sensor OFF position and the scanning end position.
170
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
Function Parameter Table Selections Function 1=1m Selects the maximum length of the original that can 2=2m be scanned.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
083 Not Used 084 Line As No Paper 1 = Ring (ring) 2 = Busy (keep line busy) 085~ 086 087 088 089 090~ 091 092 093 ~ 094 095 096 ~ 101 102 Not Used Darker Level Normal Level Lighter Level Not Used Smoothing Not Used Reduction Ratio Not Used Book Top Feed (70-100) 0 = Lightest Contrast ~ 15 = Darkest Contrast
Selects whether to ring or send a busy tone to the remote station when the recording paper runs out or the unit cannot receive because of any trouble.
1 = Off 2 = On
103 Book End Feed 104~ 109 110 111 112 Not Used
-30 ~ +30 -9 ~ 0
Indicates the MAC Address. Selects whether the Text Template (email message) is programmable and added on all email sent in the message body above the top line of text. (Up to 40 characters Programmed in the User Parameters.) Note: After enabling this feature, aside from entering the text in the User Parameters, it also has to be activated in each Auto Dial Number before it will take effect. It does not work for Direct Dialed Numbers.
1 = Scroll 2 = Direct
1 = Yes 2 = No
Selects the setting method for Time Zone. Scroll : Allows using "Scroll Keys" to scroll through the Time Zone Table. Direct : Allows you to input the Time Zone directly, (*) key to be used as a switch between +/-. Selects whether the Overwrite Warning is included on the Internet FAX Result Receipt when programming the Auto Dialer via email. 171
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
1 = Off 2 = On 123 One Ring Sound 1 = Off (USA and Canada 2 = On Only) (Effective from Sept. 2004 Production) 124 ~ Not Used 199
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Function
When LDAP is used, specialized characters may be displayed as different characters. When Function Parameter No. 45 "Ring Detect Count" is set to 1 Ring, and this parameter is enabled (On), the machine will only ring once out loud, answering on the second ring count.
Note 1: Continuous Polling (Station Mode) This feature allows you to store or add documents into a polled file in memory. To enable the Continuous Polling feature set Function Parameter No. 003 to "2:Station". The last Program Key will be assigned with the Store 4 Poll Key name automatically and cannot be changed. To prepare the document(s) to be polled, simply place the document(s) on the ADF or Platen and then press the Program Key to store or add the document(s) into a polled file. (Note: If a regular polled file is stored in memory, the Program Key for Continuous Polling will not be accepted.) Note 2: Function Parameter No. 070 (Line Error)-Transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/PIN Signal MCF/PIP RTP/PIP RTN/PIN Setting 3:512 4:1024 0-127 0-255 128-255 256-511 256-511 512-1023
6:Off Always -
Note 3: Function Parameter No. 071 (Total Error)-Transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/PIN Signal MCF/PIP RTP/PIP RTN/PIN Setting 2:10% 3:15% 0-4 0-7 5-9 8-14 1015-
Note 4: The default setting of parameters depends on the countrys specifications or regulations. Print the Function Parameter List to confirm the default settings.
172
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
5.2.4.
From this Service Mode you can print the Function Parameter List, Page Memory Test, Printer Report, All Document File, Protocol Trace and the Toner Order Form.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
5.2.4.1.
A list of all Function Parameters can be printed by the following procedure. Press the V, /\ arrow keys to select the "3: Print Report/List" on the display. Press the SET key. Press the SET key to select the "1:Function Parameter List". Press the STOP key twice to exit the service mode.
173
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Note: The power must be reset for the new parameter settings to take effect. -PANASONIC ***** ******************* -PANASONIC -
Note: 1. The contents of the Function Parameter List may vary depending on the countrys regulations. 2. * mark will be shown on the left side of number when setting was changed from default.
174
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Note: The power must be reset for the new parameter settings to take effect. -PANASONIC ***** ****************** -PANASONIC -
Note: 1. The contents of the Function Parameter List may vary depending on the countrys regulations. 2. * mark will be shown on the left side of number when setting was changed from default.
175
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
5.2.4.2.
A test pattern prints out for checking the page memory and printer mechanism using the following procedure. Press the V, /\ arrow keys to select the "3: Print Report/List" on the display. Press the SET key. Press the V, /\ arrow keys to select the "3: Page Memory Test". Press the SET key. Press the STOP key twice to exit the service mode.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
************* TEST PATTERN PRINT **************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 12:07 ***P.01
176
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
5.2.4.3.
All printer errors are logged on the Printer Report which can be printed by the following procedure. Press the V, /\ arrow keys to select the "3: Print Report/List" on the display. Press the SET key. Press the V, /\ arrow keys to select the "4: Printer Report". Press the SET key. Press the STOP key twice to exit the service mode.
Printer Report
UF-9000 DP-180/190
**************-PRINTER REPORT-********************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 19:02******** LAST PRINT ERROR SERIAL NUMBER CUSTOMER ID FIRMWARE VERSION SC PNL SPC (SCANNER) PRINTER TRANSMIT COUNTER RECEIVE COUNTER COPY COUNTER PRINT COUNTER : MMM-dd-yyyy 15:38 J00 : : 1234567890123456 00-00000016
ERROR CODE RRROR COUNT NO.DATE & TIME ERROR CODE RRROR COUNT | NO.DATE & TIME -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------01.MMM-dd-yyyy 15:38 J00 00-00000016 | 02.MMM-dd-yyyy 10:48 J02 00-00000016 | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-*******-12345678901234567890-**************
177
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
5.2.4.4.
Print the document files from the Flash Memory. Press the V, /\ arrow keys to select the "3: Print Report/List" on the display. Press the SET key. Press the V, /\ arrow keys to select the "5: All Document Files". Press the SET key. Press the STOP key twice to exit the service mode.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
178
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
5.2.4.5.
Print a Protocol Trace Report for the previous communication. Press the V, /\ arrow keys to select the "3: Print Report/List" on the display. Press the SET key to select the "1:Function Parameter List". Press the V, /\ arrow keys select the "6: Protocol Trace". Press the SET key. Press the STOP key twice to exit the service mode.
Protocol Trace
UF-9000 DP-180/190
*************** PROTOCOL LOG. REPORT ****************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 16:56 *******
: : : : :
COMMAND LOG. REMOTE : NSF CSI DIS CFR LOCAL : TSI DCS PIX PPS-EOP -----------------------------------------------------------------REMOTE : MCF LOCAL : DCN -PANASONIC ****************************-PANASONIC -*************-12345678901234567890-***************
179
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
5.2.4.6.
The Toner Order Form can be printed out manually by the following procedure. Press the V, /\ arrow keys to select the "3: Print Report/List" on the display. Press the SET key to select the "1:Function Parameter List". Press the V, /\ arrow keys to select the "7: Toner Order Form". Press the SET key. Press the STOP key twice to exit the service mode.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
180
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
**** The toner supply in your machine is running low **** (1) To order a replacement Cartridge from your Authorized Dealer Panasonic Corp. (2) by Phone: by Fax: 1 201 111 5555 (3) 1 201 111 4444 (4)
Attention: Phone No.: Customer ID: ABC COMPANY (5) Toner Cartridge No.:
(6)
Serial No.:
Quantity Required:
Explanation of Contents (1) Low Toner Message (Fixed) (2) Dealer Name (3) Toner Order Tel # (4) Toner Order Fax # (5) Customer ID (6) Toner Cartridge No. The toner supply in your machine is running low Up to 25 digits Up to 36 digits Up to 36 digits Up to 16 characters (User Identification Code) Refer to the Supply list
181
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
5.2.5. 5.2.5.1.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
This Service Mode is used to check the binary signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the following procedure. Press the V, /\ arrow keys to select the "4: MODEM Test" on the display. Press the SET key to select the "1: Signal Test". Press the SET key. Press the desired number. Press the SET key. Press the STOP key twice to exit the service mode. Binary Signal Table Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Signals V21 300bps V27ter 2400bps V27ter 4800bps V29 7200bps V29 9600bps V17 TC7200bps V17 TC9600bps V17 12000bps V17 14400bps
182
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
5.2.5.2.
This Service Mode is used to check the tonal signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the following procedure. Press the V, /\ arrow keys to select the "4: MODEM Test" on the display. Press the SET key to select the "2: Tonal Test". Press the SET key. Press the desired number and press the "START" key. Press the STOP key twice to exit the service mode. Tonal Signal Table Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Signals 462 Hz 1080 Hz 1100 Hz 1300 Hz 1650 Hz 1850 Hz 2100 Hz
Tonal Signal
UF-9000 DP-180/190
183
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
5.2.5.3.
This Service Mode is used to check the DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) signal output. The DTMF signal can be generated using the following procedure. DTMF Single Tone Press the V, /\ arrow keys to select the "4: MODEM Test" on the display. Press the SET key to select the "3: DTMF Test". Press the SET key. Press the V, /\ arrow keys to select the "1. Single". Press the desired number and press the "START" key. Press the STOP key twice to exit the service mode. DTMF Dual Tone Press the V, /\ arrow keys to select the "4: MODEM Test" on the display. Press the SET key to select the "3: DTMF Test". Press the SET key. Press the V, /\ arrow keys to select the "2. Dual". Press the desired number and press the "START" key. Press the STOP key twice to exit the service mode. DTMF Single Tone Table Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DTMF Signal Tones 697 Hz 770 Hz 852 Hz 941 Hz 1209 Hz 1336 Hz 1477 Hz 1633 Hz DTMF Dual Tone Table Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 * # DTMF Dual Tones 941 Hz + 1336 Hz 697 Hz + 1209 Hz 697 Hz + 1336 Hz 697 Hz + 1477 Hz 770 Hz + 1209 Hz 770 Hz + 1336 Hz 770 Hz + 1477 Hz 852 Hz + 1209 Hz 852 Hz + 1336 Hz 852 Hz + 1477 Hz 941 Hz + 1209 Hz 941 Hz + 1477 Hz
DTMF Signal
UF-9000 DP-180/190
184
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
5.2.5.4.
This Service Mode is used to check the binary signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the following procedure. (V.34) Press the V, /\ arrow keys to select the "4: MODEM Test" on the display. Press the SET key to select the "4: V34 MODEM". Press the SET key. Press the desired number and press the "START" key. Press the STOP key twice to exit the service mode. Binary Signal Table Number 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Signals V34 2400 sr 2400 bps V34 2400 sr 4800 bps V34 2400 sr 7200 bps V34 2400 sr 9600 bps V34 2400 sr 12000 bps V34 2400 sr 14400 bps V34 2400 sr 16800 bps V34 2400 sr 19200 bps V34 2400 sr 21600 bps V34 2800 sr 4800 bps V34 2800 sr 7200 bps V34 2800 sr 9600 bps V34 2800 sr 12000 bps V34 2800 sr 14400 bps V34 2800 sr 16800 bps V34 2800 sr 19200 bps V34 2800 sr 21600 bps V34 2800 sr 24000 bps V34 2800 sr 26400 bps V34 3000 sr 4800 bps V34 3000 sr 7200 bps Number 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 Signals V34 3000 sr 9600 bps V34 3000 sr 12000 bps V34 3000 sr 14400 bps V34 3000 sr 16800 bps V34 3000 sr 19200 bps V34 3000 sr 21600 bps V34 3000 sr 24000 bps V34 3000 sr 26400 bps V34 3000 sr 28800 bps V34 3200 sr 4800 bps V34 3200 sr 7200 bps V34 3200 sr 9600 bps V34 3200 sr 12000 bps V34 3200 sr 14400 bps V34 3200 sr 16800 bps V34 3200 sr 19200 bps V34 3200 sr 21600 bps V34 3200 sr 24000 bps V34 3200 sr 26400 bps V34 3200 sr 28800 bps V34 3200 sr 31200 bps Number 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 Signals V34 3429 sr 4800 bps V34 3429 sr 7200 bps V34 3429 sr 9600 bps V34 3429 sr 12000 bps V34 3000 sr 19200 bps V34 3429 sr 16800 bps V34 3429 sr 19200 bps V34 3429 sr 21600 bps V34 3429 sr 24000 bps V34 3429 sr 26400 bps V34 3429 sr 28800 bps V34 3429 sr 31200 bps V34 3429 sr 33600 bps ANSam CM JM INFO0c & TONEB INFO0c & TONEA PPh & AC & ALT
UF-9000 DP-180/190
185
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
5.2.6.
Initializes RAM and restores the Function Parameters to their default values. Note: This operation should be performed when the unit is first installed. Press the V, /\ arrow keys to select the "6: RAM initialize" on the display. Press the SET key to select the desired Mode number. Press the "SET" key to initialize RAM. Press the STOP key twice to exit the service mode. RAM Initialization Table No. 01 Initialize Mode PARAMETER INITIALIZE Description Restores the Fax and Function Parameters to default values. Note: Turn the Power Switch to the OFF and back to the ON position to enable the parameter settings. Clears the Journal contents. Clears the One-touch, ABBR Numbers and Phone Books. Clears the Program keys. Clears the Logo, ID, Polling Password. Clears the Printer Error Log. Deletes all setting information, except parameter number 80 and 81, then set default values. Deletes all information in the Flash Memory. Clears all Jobs stored in Flash Memory.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09
JOURNAL CLEAR AUTO DIAL CLEAR PROGRAM DIAL CLEAR LOGO/ID/PSWD CLEAR LBP ERROR LOG CLEAR SHIPMENT SET FLASH MEMORY CLEAR ALL JOB CLEAR
186
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
5.2.7. 5.2.7.1.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
This feature enables the Authorized Servicing Dealers to manage and improve the machine maintenance to their customers by alerting them of equipment problems. It also can be used as a Supply Sales Tool by alerting the Dealer that the unit is running Low on Toner. The function overview is as follows: 1. The machines printer error information is stored in the Printer Report. 2. The printer report can be manually printed when required. 3. When printer errors occurs, the unit can automatically transmit the Service Alert Report to the preregistered telephone number or email address. 4. When the unit detects Low Toner or PM counter reached the maintenance timing, it can automatically transmit the Maintenance Alert Report to the pre-registered telephone number or email address. Press the V, /\ arrow keys to select the "08 Check & Call" on the display. Press the SET key to select the desired code number. (i.e. 01 Service Alert Fax #, input the telephone No. or for an email address, press the "FAX/EMAIL" Mode key and input the email address.) Press the "SET" key. Press the STOP key twice to exit the service mode.
5.2.7.2.
Conditions under which a report can be printed or transmitted 1. Manual print The Printer Report can be printed by Service Mode 3. (See Sect. 5.2.4.3.) 2. Automatic transmission/printout a. Service Alert Report When the unit detects an Emergency Printer Error, the unit will immediately transmit the Service Alert Report to the pre-registered telephone number or email address. However, the unit will not transmit the Service Alert Report if it finds the same error within the same date in the error log. b. Maintenance Alert Report When the unit detects Low Toner, the unit can automatically transmit the Maintenance Alert Report to the pre-registered telephone number or email address. Refer to the Error Code Table. c. Toner Order Form When the unit detects Low Toner, the unit can automatically print the Toner Order Form with the preregistered order information. d. Call Counter Report When the printer counter reaches the pre-set number, the unit can automatically transmit the Call Counter Report to the pre-registered telephone number or email address. Note: The Service and Maintenance Alert Reports are managed in the same manner as the normal memory transmission (Retry, Incomplete, File List, Display while it is transmitting, Journal).
Printer Reports
187
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Log O
Tx Remarks Report S Refer to the Mechanical Error Code (E Code) Table. (Sect. 4.7.3.) Out of Toner. Refer to the Jam Error Code (J Code) Table. (Sect. 4.7.2.) Refer to the User Error Code (U Code) Table. (Sect. 4.7.1.) M Low Toner.
188
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
5.2.7.3.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
*************************************************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 03:47 ******** **************************** > SERVICE ALERT REPORT < **************************** LAST PRINT ERROR : MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01 : ABC COMPANY : : 00-00000013
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : :
: : :
CURRENT 0 3 10
F7-04 ADF Count ADF Read Count Scanner Count Scanner Read Count F7-05 Copy Print Count Copy Scan Count F7-06 PC Print Count PC Scan Count F7-07 FAX Transmit Count FAX Receive Count FAX Print Count
: : : : : : : : : : :
1 1 9 9 3 4 0 6 0 0 0
- ***** -31415926535897932384-*********
Explanation of Contents (1) Customer ID (2) Firmware Version (3) Counter Information (4) Print Error Last 30 records (Latest on top)
189
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
5.2.7.4.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
*************************************************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 12:00 ******** **************************** > MAINTENANCE ALERT REPORT < ****************************
LAST PRINT ERROR : MACHINE IS RUNNING OUT OF TONER (1) CUSTOMER ID : ABC COMPANY (2)
(4)
NO.DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT NO.DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- ***** -31415926535897932384-***********
Explanation of Contents (1) Low Toner Message (Fixed) (2) Customer ID (3) Firmware Version (4) Transmission / Reception / Copy / Print Counters MACHINE IS RUNNING OUT OF TONER Up to 16 characters (User Identification Code)
5.2.7.5.
190
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
**** The toner supply in your machine is running low **** (1) To order a replacement Cartridge from your Authorized Dealer Panasonic Corp. (2) by Phone: by Fax: 1 201 111 5555 (3) 1 201 111 4444 (4)
Attention: Phone No.: Customer ID: ABC COMPANY (5) Toner Cartridge No.:
(6)
Serial No.:
Quantity Required:
Explanation of Contents (1) Low Toner Message (Fixed) (2) Dealer Name (3) Toner Order Tel # (4) Toner Order Fax # (5) Customer ID (6) Toner Cartridge No. The toner supply in your machine is running low Up to 25 digits Up to 36 digits Up to 36 digits Up to 16 characters (User Identification Code) Refer to the Supply list
191
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
5.2.7.6.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
*************************************************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 03:47 ******** ***************************************************************** > SCHEDULED REPORT - CALL COUNTER HAS REACHED PRE-SET VALUE < ***************************************************************** LAST PRINT ERROR : MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01 00-00000013
: ABC COMPANY : :
A4/LETTER Count A4-R/LETTER-R Count A3/LEDGER Count B4/LEGAL Count F7-04 ADF Count ADF Read Count Scanner Count Scanner Read Count F7-05 Copy Print Count Copy Scan Count F7-06 PC Print Count PC Scan Count F7-07 FAX Transmit Count FAX Receive Count FAX Print Count
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : :
CURRENT 3 10 0 0 1 1 9 9 3 4 0 6 0 0 0
14000
NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT | NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------01 MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01 00-00000013 | 02 MMM-dd-yyyy 20:04 E04-01 00-00000013 | | | | | | | | | | | | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------LOGO PANASONIC ***** *********************** -CHARACTER ID -
- ***** -31415926535897932384-*********
Explanation of Contents (1) Customer ID (2) Firmware Version (3) Counter Information (4) Call Counter Pre-Set Value
192
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
5.2.8. 5.2.8.1.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
This Service Mode is used to maintain the machine. Use the following procedure for System Maintenance. Press the V, /\ arrow keys to select the "9: System Maintenance" on the display. Press the SET key to select the "1: Send RCVD File". The display changes to the Fax Mode. Select the desired Fax number. Press "START" to send the Fax. After the transmission, the machine returns to the Stand-by Mode. Note: If there is NO File in the machine, this operation will not function. Press the STOP key twice to exit the service mode. System Maintenance Table No. Maintenance Mode 01 Send RCV'D File Description Transfers documents from memory to another fax machine during a fatal printer error.
193
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
6 System Description
6.1. Scanning / Transmit Mechanism
UF-9000 DP-180/190
The transmit mechanism consists of components which feed, scan and eject documents, as well as send signals. These components and their functions are as follows:
6.1.1.
The ADF (Automatic Document Feeder) automatically feeds paper into the unit, and consists of ADF roller and separation rubber. The document is placed face up on the Document Tray before being fed into the unit. The ADF Roller feeds individual pages into the scanning area. The Separation Rubber separates documents placed on the ADF, preventing multiple feeding.
ADF Mechanism
6.1.2. Transmit Guide Unit The transmit guide unit is an auxiliary part used for feeding and ejecting documents. It consists of the Transmit Guide, Control Panel Chassis, Feed Roller, Eject Roller, and Eject Pinch Roller and Feed Pinch Roller. This unit also provides the white scanning area and serves as a base for electronic white reference.
Transmit Mechanism Drive System This system feeds documents through the transmitting mechanism, and consists of rollers, gears and a stepper motor. The Motor, a stepper motor, controlled by the CPU, drives the ADF roller, feed roller and eject roller, with the speed based on the density of the picture information. The Feed Roller feeds the document to the scanning point and ejects the document out of the machine.
6.1.3.
6.1.4.
The verification stamp unit stamps the "X" mark on the face of the document after the document is successfully transmitted or stored.
6.1.5.
The scanner block consists of four mirrors, a Lens and a CCD PC Board. 194
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
Scanner Block
The mirrors, Mirror 1 and Mirror 2, reflect image information in the form of light through the Lens. The Lens focuses the image information and passes it to the CCD. The CCD, mounted on the CCD PC board, converts the image information into the electronic signals.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
6.1.6.
Drive System
6.2.
The Control Panel consists of the PNL PC Board and LCD Unit, which displays the various status messages, and a hard key-type panel.
Control Panel
195
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
6.3.
6.3.1.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
196
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
6.3.2.
Print Process
UF-9000 DP-180/190
6.3.2.1.
The charge corona applies a high, uniform positive charge to the surface of the organic photoconductor (OPC) drum. The charge level is approximately 900 VDC and remains because the OPC drum has a high electrical resistance when concealed in darkness.
Charge
6.3.2.2.
The laser beam passes through the collimator lens, is reflected by the polygon mirror, and is focused onto the drum after passing through an image-forming ( ) lens and a reflection mirror. Wherever the laser beam strikes the drum, the positive charge dissipates. A latent electrical image of two different voltages potentials, which corresponds to the original page, is formed on the OPC drum.
Exposure
6.3.2.3.
Development: Non-magnetic toner is supplied to the conductive roller by the toner supply roller. The toner on the conductive roller is positively charged by friction with the toner supply roller, and the doctor blade ensures a thin layer on the surface of the conductive roller. Wherever the conductive roller touches the drum, the positively charged toner is attracted to the latent image on the drum, and the latent image is converted to a visible toner image. A bias voltage of approx. 350 VDC is applied to the conductive roller to achieve maximum print quality. 197
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
Development / Cleaning
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Cleaning: After transfer, residual toner remains on the drum surface, and for next printing, the residual toner reaches to the development area via charge and exposure. The charge level of the OPC corresponds to the white background is +900VDC, and the bias voltage of the conductive roller is approx. +350VDC. Therefor the positively charged residual toner on the OPC drum is attracted and collected to the conductive roller. The charge level of OPC after exposure is +100VDC. So, the printing area of the OPC is cleaned.
6.3.2.4.
As the paper is fed between the drum and the transfer roller, a high negative charge is applied to the back of the paper. The positive toner particles are then attracted from the drum surface to the paper. After transfer, the paper is separated from the drum surface by the curvature of the drum. The paper passes through the fuser rollers and is subjected to heat and pressure. The fusing temperature is approximately 190C (374F), and the pressure is approximately 0.36kg/cm (3.53N/cm). This bonds, or fuses, the toner into the paper. Media Tray The main motor drives the pick up roller after the pick up solenoid is energized, which engages the pick up roller clutch and feeds a sheet of paper. The paper is pushed to the paper feed roller, which overdrives the paper slightly causing a buckle to ensure the paper is aligned with the stationary registration roller. While triggering the registration sensor notifying the CPU paper is ready to feed. The paper at this point is at the same position as with manual feed. Manual Feed when paper is inserted, it activates the registration sensor. At the predetermined period of time, the CPU energizes the registration solenoid that allows the registration roller to rotate, feeding paper to the Paper Path Sensor.
Transfer
6.3.2.5.
Fusing
6.3.3.
Paper Feed
198
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
6.3.4. 6.3.4.1.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
The light beam from the laser diode (light source) is modulated by the digital signal (nVIDEO) and converted to parallel light waves by the collimator lens. The beam is then sent to the rotating polygon mirror (polygon scanner), where it is reflected through the lens and then focused onto the OPC drum surface. The diameter of the beam is about 80 m, and the light moves across the surface of the OPC drum in the scanning direction of right to left. As the drum rotates (sub-scans), a static image is formed where the laser beam touches the drum surface. The laser beam is also deflected to the timing sensor. This sensor controls the start timing of scanning on the drum, providing a consistent left margin. The CPU uses the timing sensor to detect abnormal signals.
6.3.4.2.
The laser beam is pulsed on and off by the digital signal (nVIDEO) to form a latent image of two different voltage potentials on the drum, as shown below.
Laser Beam
Laser Diode Specification Item Oscillation Wavelength Output Light Power (OPC Drum Surface) Minimum 770 0.315 Standard 785 0.350 Maximum 800 0.385 nm mW
199
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
The collimator lens converts light from the laser diode to parallel light. This aids in scanning and provides better convergence to a dot.
6.3.4.3.
Collimator Lens
UF-9000 DP-180/190
The polygon scanner consists of a 6-sided mirror directly driven by a brushless DC motor at a rate 20,078.74 rpm. The laser beam is reflected across the OPC drum by the mirror faces and produces the scan. One mirror face is equal to one main scan. This unit features stable line scanning speed, precision mirror surface reflection angle, reflect-free surfaces, and instant start. Polygon Scanner Specifications Item Mirror Revolution Specification 6 20,078.74 faces rpm
6.3.4.4.
Polygon Scanner
6.3.4.5.
Each of the polygon mirror surfaces has a slight imperfection. This prevents the beam from scanning the OPC drum surface at the constant interval in the sub-scan direction. The cylindrical lens and used for correcting this uneven laser scanning. lens are
Lens
6.3.4.6.
This lens ensures that the beam scans across the surface of the OPC drum at a constant rate. The beam is refracted to parallel light as it passes through the lens to ensure that the dots at the edge of the drum and at the center of the drum are equally spaced. This lens also provides a set focal length for laser beam. Specifications Item Scanning Width Focusing Light Spot Size Specification 207.43 80 x 90 mm m
Lens
6.3.4.7.
This sensor detects the laser beam and determines the start timing for scanning. A pin photodiode is used as the timing sensor.
Timing Sensor
200
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
A 600W heat lamp (halogen lamp) heats the surface of the teflon-coated heat roller to approximately 190C (374F), a thermistor monitors the heat roller temperature, and the CPU controls the ON/OFF timing of the lamp.
6.3.5.
Fuser Unit
UF-9000 DP-180/190
The thermostat is mounted 2.5mm away from the heat roller. If the ambient temperature reaches 190C (374F), the thermostat is opened, and power is removed from the heat lamp. The surface of the thermostat is not as hot as that of the heat roller. When the thermostat opens, the surface of the heat roller may reach 210C (410F), and the system displays E4-01. If the thermistor opens, the system displays E4-01. If by chance the thermostat malfunctions a thermal fuse opens. The pressure roller is kept in contact with the heat roller through 2 pressure springs, which apply a pressure of approximately 0.36 kg/cm (3.56 N/cm). Drive is supplied from the main motor via intermediate gears.
201
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
6.3.6.
A. Normal Printing Mode (Not Duplex Mode) After fusing, paper is fed to the output tray by the Upper Exit Roller and Upper Exit Pinch Roller. The Paper Exit/ADU Paper Jam Sensor detects paper. If paper does not arrive at the sensor within a predetermined period of time, Jam at A is displayed, and if paper remains at the sensor beyond a predetermined period, Jam at B is displayed on the computer screen. Paper is ejected face down and stored in the output tray.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
B. Duplex Mode After fusing, paper is fed to the output tray by the Upper Exit Roller and Upper Exit Pinch Roller. The Paper Exit/ADU Paper Jam Sensor detects paper. If paper does not arrive at the sensor within a predetermined period of time, Jam at A is displayed on the computer screen. At the specified time after the sensor detects the bottom of paper, the Exit Roller rotates in reverse direction, turning ON the Exit solenoid to move the ratchet lever to Duplex Position. As a result, the paper is fed to the development area through the Auto Duplex Unit (ADU). If paper remains at the sensor beyond a predetermined period, Jam at E is displayed. Paper is ejected face down and stored in the output tray.
202
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
6.4.
6.4.1.
Signal Waveform
Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations
Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations Signal Name Function +12V +12 VDC Power Supply +24V +24 VDC Power Supply +24VIR +24 VDC through Front Cover Safety Interlock SW +3.3V +3.3 VDC Power Supply +5V +5 VDC Power Supply +5V(LD) +5 VDC through Process Interlock SW +5VB +5 VDC Power Supply +5VP +5 VDC Power Supply +5VSP +5 VDC Energy Saver Control +ACT ACTIVE Lamp LED Power Supply +ALM ALARM Lamp LED Power Supply +DAT DATA Lamp LED Power Supply +SLP Energy Saver Lamp LED Power Supply 24VGND Ground 5VGND Ground A 2nd Feeder Motor Control Signal ADCLK A/D Sample Clock Input for 3-Channels Mode ADF_CLUCH-2 ADF Clutch Control Signal ADF_COVER-2 ADF Cover Open Detection Signal ADF_MOTER_MODE-2 ADF Motor Mode Control Signal ADF_ON_LINE ADF Detection Signal ADF_PAPER-S1-2 ADF Paper Detection Sensor Signal ADF_PAPER-S2-2 ADF Registration Sensor Signal ADF_PAPER-S3-2 ADF Sensor Signal ADF_STAMP-2 ADF STAMP Control Signal ADFPH0-1 ADF Motor Control Signal ADFPH1-1 ADF Motor Control Signal ADFPH2-1 ADF Motor Control Signal ADFPH3-1 ADF Motor Control Signal AFE-SCK Clock Input for Serial Interface AFE-SDI Serial Data Input/Output AFE-SEN Serial Interface Load Pulse ATA0 HDD Address Signal ATA1 HDD Address Signal ATA2 HDD Address Signal ATAINT HDD Interruption Signal ATCS0 Master HDD Select Signal ATCS1 Slave HDD Select Signal ATD0 HDD Data Signal ATD1 HDD Data Signal ATD10 HDD Data Signal ATD11 HDD Data Signal
UF-9000 DP-180/190
203
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
Signal Name ATD12 ATD13 ATD14 ATD15 ATD2 ATD3 ATD4 ATD5 ATD6 ATD7 ATD8 ATD9 ATIORD ATIORDY ATIOWR ATRST B BAT+ BZCLK C1C1+ C2C2+ C3+ C4+ CCD-CK1 CCD-CK2 CCD-CP CCD-RS CCD-TG CCLK CDSCLK1 CDSCLK2 CLOCK_OP CSB1 CXD DD+ DASP DB0 DB1 DB2 DB3 DB4 DB5 DB6
Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations Function HDD Data Signal HDD Data Signal HDD Data Signal HDD Data Signal HDD Data Signal HDD Data Signal HDD Data Signal HDD Data Signal HDD Data Signal HDD Data Signal HDD Data Signal HDD Data Signal HDD Data Read Signal HDD Read / Write Ready Signal HDD Data Write Signal HDD Reset Signal 2nd Feeder Motor Control Signal Lithium Battery Buzzer Signal Output Capacitor 1 Negative Connection Pin for Converter Capacitor 1 Positive Connection Pin for Converter Capacitor 2 Negative Connection Pin for Converter Capacitor 2 Positive Connection Pin for Converter Capacitor 3 Positive Connection Pin for Converter Capacitor 4 Positive Connection Pin for Converter Image Data Transmission Clock Image Data Transmission Clock Clamp Gate Signal Reset Gate Signal Shift Gate Signal Serial I/F Clock CDS Reference Clock Signal CDS Data Clock Signal CLOCK Chip Select Signal Serial Data Command USB Data Signal USB Data Signal HDD Active Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal 204
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
Signal Name DB7 E_RDB EBC3A[20] EBC3A[21] EBC3A[22] EBC3A[23] EBC3A[24] EBC3A[25] EBC3A[26] EBC3A[27] EBC3A[28] EBC3A[29] EBC3A[30] EBC3A[31] EBC3D[0] EBC3D[1] EBC3D[2] EBC3D[3] EBC3D[4] EBC3D[5] EBC3D[6] EBC3D[7] EXITSOL_CTL FANNERR FANPWR GLA GLK(GND) GND HOME HPMB INV-SW-1 IO16 KCCNT KIN0 KIN1 KIN2 KIN3 KIN4 KIN5 KIN6 KIN7 LED0 LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4
Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations Function Data Signal Read/Write Execution Control Signal System Address Bus System Address Bus System Address Bus System Address Bus System Address Bus System Address Bus System Address Bus System Address Bus System Address Bus System Address Bus System Address Bus System Address Bus System Data Bus System Data Bus System Data Bus System Data Bus System Data Bus System Data Bus System Data Bus System Data Bus Exit Solenoid Control Fan Error Detection Signal +24 VDC Fan Power LED Control Signal Ground Ground Home Position Detection Signal LCD Driver Power Control Signal Inverter Control Signal 16-bit Transmission Control Signal Mechanical Counter Detect Signal PNL Key Signal (Key Line) PNL Key Signal (Key Line) PNL Key Signal (Key Line) PNL Key Signal (Key Line) PNL Key Signal (Key Line) PNL Key Signal (Key Line) PNL Key Signal (Key Line) PNL Key Signal (Key Line) PNL LED Control Signal PNL LED Control Signal PNL LED Control Signal PNL LED Control Signal PNL LED Control Signal 205
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
Signal Name LED5 LED6 LED7 LED8 LED9 LEDCT0 LEDCT1 LEDCT2 LEDCT3 LEDCT4 MODE-SW N.C. n5VMTON NA nADUST nAPNT NB nBECOE nBOOK NCBSY nCHGCTL nCSMON nDB nDBCH nEBCWBE[0] nEXITSEN nFCTL nFXBSET nFXBWUP nHKOF5V nHSYNC nLDON nLEDACT nLEDALM nLEDAT nLEDSLP nLPOW1 nMDMINT nMDMRST nMMCTL nMMHALF nMMLD nMOEN_OP nMPOW1 nMVOL0 nMVOL1
Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations Function PNL LED Control Signal PNL LED Control Signal PNL LED Control Signal PNL LED Control Signal PNL LED Control Signal PNL LED Control Signal PNL LED Control Signal PNL LED Control Signal PNL LED Control Signal PNL LED Control Signal Scan Mode Select Signal No Connection Monitor ON / OFF Select Signal 2nd Feeder Motor Control Signal LSU APC Timing ADF Paper Detection Sensor Signal 2nd Feeder Motor Control Signal Read Control Signal ADF Open / Close Detection Signal Busy Command HVPS Charge Control (ON/OFF) Modem Chip Select Signal Developer (+ Voltage PWM Pulse) Developer Charge (+/- Change) Write Control Signal EXIT Sensor Signal Fuser ON/OFF Control FXB Detection Signal Wake Up Signal Off-Hook Detection Signal Horizontal Sync Signal LD Light Enable ACTIVE Lamp LED Control Signal ALARM Lamp LED Control Signal DATA Lamp LED Control Signal Energy Saver Lamp LED Control Signal +5 VDC Power Supply Return Signal Modem Interruption Signal Modem Reset Signal Main Motor Control Signal Motor Rotation Speed Control Main Motor Rotation Signal 2nd Feeder Motor Control Signal Power Supply Control Signal Monitor Volume Control Signal Monitor Volume Control Signal 206
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
Signal Name nMVOL2 nOPTION nPON_OP NPRDY NPRINT nPUCTL_OP NPURGE nREGSEN NRES NSBSY nSCNDOR nSCNRST nSLPKY nSNRCLK nSNRCTL nSNRLD nTESEN NTOP nTOPSEN nTR nTRCTL NVIDEO nVIDEO nWAKEUP OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 pCMLD PNLRXD PNLTXD PNON pPNLRST PS PSAVE PUSOL_CTL PUSOL_CTL1 REGSOL_CTL RESETB RS RW_WRD RXDRXD+ SCN[0] SCN[1] SCN[10]
Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations Function Monitor Volume Control Signal 2nd Feeder Option Detection Signal 2nd Feeder No Paper Detection Signal Printer Ready Print Start 2nd Feeder Paper Pick up Control Paper End Detection Signal REGISTRATION Sensor Signal Printer Reset Busy Status ADF Open / Close Detection Signal Scanner Reset Signal Energy Saver Key Signal LSU Motor Clock LSU Motor Control Signal LSU Motor Lock Signal Low Toner Sensor Signal Paper Top Detection Signal Paper Detect Sensor Signal Transfer (- Voltage PWM Pulse) HVPS Transfer Control (+/- Change) Video Data Video Signal Wake Up Signal Motor Drive Signal Motor Drive Signal Motor Drive Signal Motor Drive Signal CML ON / OFF Select Signal PNL Reception Data Signal PNL Transmission Data Signal No Paper Sensor Signal PNL Reset Signal Parallel / Serial Data Input Select Signal Power Save Control Signal Pick Up Solenoid Control Pick Up Solenoid Control Registration Solenoid Control LCD Driver Reset Signal Register Selection Control Signal Read/Write Execution Control Signal LAN Receiving Data LAN Receiving Data PNL Key Signal (Scan Line) PNL Key Signal (Scan Line) PNL Key Signal (Scan Line) 207
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Ver. 3.0
APR 2006
Signal Name SCN[11] SCN[2] SCN[3] SCN[4] SCN[5] SCN[6] SCN[7] SCN[8] SCN[9] SXD TH TXDTXD+ V0 V1 V2 V3 V4 VBUS Vc1 VCC VCDS VCNT VDD VINA VINX VOUT VOUTA VOUTB VOUTX VSS VTED WEBSOL X1 X2 Y1 Y2 YLA YLK(GND) ZCIN
Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations Function PNL Key Signal (Scan Line) PNL Key Signal (Scan Line) PNL Key Signal (Scan Line) PNL Key Signal (Scan Line) PNL Key Signal (Scan Line) PNL Key Signal (Scan Line) PNL Key Signal (Scan Line) PNL Key Signal (Scan Line) PNL Key Signal (Scan Line) Serial Data Status Fuser Thermistor Signal LAN Transmission Data LAN Transmission Data LCD Driver Supply Voltages LCD Driver Supply Voltages LCD Driver Supply Voltages LCD Driver Supply Voltages LCD Driver Supply Voltages +5 VDC Power Supply LCD Driver Reference Voltage +5 VDC Power Supply Density Sensor ON Inverter Control Signal +3.3 VDC Power Supply Sensor Input Signal Sensor Input Signal Voltage Converter Input / Output Sensor Control Signal Sensor Control Signal Sensor Control Signal Ground Toner Detect Sensor ON Web Solenoid Control Signal Touch Panel Matrix Signal Touch Panel Matrix Signal Touch Panel Matrix Signal Touch Panel Matrix Signal LED Control Signal Ground Zero Crossing Signal
UF-9000 DP-180/190
208
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
6.4.2.
CN300
SC PC Board
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Signal Waveform
+24V +24V
Sleep Mode Shutdown Mode 0V Sleep Mode Shutdown Mode 0V Sleep Mode Shutdown Mode 0V
CN300-2
+24V
LVPS CN101-2
+24V +24V
CN300-3
+24V
LVPS CN101-3
+24V +24V
CN300-4
GND
LVPS CN101-4
Ground
0V
CN300-5 GND LVPS CN101-5 Ground
0V
CN300-6 +5V LVPS CN101-6
+5V +5V
CN300-7
+5V
LVPS CN101-7
+5V +5V
CN300-8
GND
LVPS CN101-8
Ground
0V
CN300-9 +3.3V LVPS CN101-9
+3.3V +3.3V
CN300-10 +3.3V
LVPS CN101-10
+3.3V +3.3V
209
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN300-11 GND LVPS CN101-11
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Function
0V
CN300-12 +5VP LVPS CN101-12
+5V
CN300-13 GND
LVPS CN101-13
Ground
0V
CN300-14 nMPOW1 LVPS CN101-14
Power Saving
+5V 0V +5V 0V
CN300-15 nFCTL
LVPS CN101-15
Heater ON
CN300-16 N.C.
LVPS CN101-16
No Connection
CN301 SC PCB Pin No. CN301-1 Signal Name nFCTL Destination Engine Control PCB CN005-1 Engine Control PCB CN005-2 Engine Control PCB CN005-3 Engine Control PCB CN005-4 Engine Control PCB CN005-5 Signal Waveform Function Fuser ON/OFF Control
Heater ON
+5V 0V
CN301-2
5VGND
Ground
0V
+5V Sleep & Shutdown 0V
+5 VDC Power Supply
CN301-3
+5V
CN301-4
24VGND
Ground
0V
Ground
CN301-5
24VGND
0V
210
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Signal Waveform
CN301-7
+24V
CN302 SC PCB Pin No. CN302-1 Signal Name +24V Destination Mechanical Counter Signal Waveform Function +24 VDC Power Supply
+24V +24V
CN302-2
KCCNT
Mechanical Counter
CN304 SC PCB Pin No. CN304-1 Signal Name +24V Destination SPC PCB P102-1 Signal Waveform Function +24 VDC Power Supply
CN304-2
+24V
CN304-3
GND
Ground
0V
CN304-4 GND SPC PCB P102-4 Ground
0V
CN304-5 +12V SPC PCB P102-5
CN304-6
GND
Ground
0V
211
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Signal Waveform
+5V Sleep & Shutdown 0V +5V Sleep & Shudown ADF Closed Doc. ON +3.3V 0V +5V
CN304-8
+5VP
CN304-9
nBOOK
CN304-10 nAPNT
CN304-11 nSCNRST
+5V Reset 0V
CN305 SC PCB Pin No. CN305-1 Signal Name VBUS Destination SPC PCB P101-1 Signal Waveform Function +5 VDC Power Supply
CN305-2
D-
USB D-
CN305-3
D+
USB D+
CN305-4
GND
Ground
0V
CN306 SC PCB Pin No. CN306-1 Signal Name +24V Destination PNL1 PCB CN220-1 Signal Waveform Function +24 VDC Power Supply
+24V +24V
212
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Function
0V
CN306-3 GND PNL1 PCB CN220-3 Ground
0V
CN306-4 GND PNL1 PCB CN220-4 Ground
0V
CN306-5 +5VP PNL1 PCB CN220-5
+5V
CN306-6
+5V
+5V +5V
CN306-7
PNLRXD
+3.3V 0V
CN306-8
PNLTXD
+3.3V 0V
CN306-9
pPNLRST
CN306-10 BZCLK
CN306-11 nLPOW1
+5V 0V
CN306-12 nSLPKY
+3.3V PRESSED 0V
213
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN306-13 nWAKEUP PNL1 PCB CN220-13
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Signal Waveform
Function
Energy Saving
+5V Wake UP 0V
Wake Up Signal
CN306-14 GND
Ground
0V
CN306-15 GND PNL1 PCB CN220-15 Ground
0V
CN306-16 nBOOK PNL1 PCB CN220-16
ADF Closed
+3.3V 0V
CN308 SC PCB Pin No. CN308-1 Signal Name NTOP Destination Engine Control PCB CN001-24 Engine Control PCB CN001-23 Engine Control PCB CN001-22 Engine Control PCB CN001-21 Engine Control PCB CN001-20 Engine Control PCB CN001-19 Engine Control PCB CN001-18 Signal Waveform Function
+5V 0V
CN308-2
ZCIN
CN308-3
NSBSY
+5V 0V
Busy Status
CN308-4
GND
Ground
0V
+5V 0V
Ground Video Data
CN308-5
NVIDEO
CN308-6
GND
0V
+5V 0V
Horizontal Synchronization
CN308-7
NHSYNC
214
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Destination Engine Control PCB CN001-17 Engine Control PCB CN001-16 Engine Control PCB CN001-15 Engine Control PCB CN001-14 Engine Control PCB CN001-13 Engine Control PCB CN001-12 Engine Control PCB CN001-11 Engine Control PCB CN001-10 Engine Control PCB CN001-9 Engine Control PCB CN001-8 Engine Control PCB CN001-7 Engine Control PCB CN001-6
Signal Waveform
CN308-9
NPURGE
CN308-10 GND
Ground
0V
+5V 0V
Ground Serial Data Command
CN308-11 CXD
CN308-12 GND
0V
+5V 0V
Ground Serial I/F Clock
CN308-13 CCLK
CN308-14 GND
0V
+5V 0V
Ground Serial Data Status
CN308-15 SXD
CN308-16 GND
0V
Print Start +5V 0V
No Connection Print Start
CN308-17 NPRINT
CN308-18 N.C.
CN308-19 NCBSY
+5V Command 0V
Busy Command
215
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN308-20 N.C. Engine Control PCB CN001-5 CN308-21 NPRDY Engine Control PCB CN001-4 Engine Control PCB CN001-3 Engine Control PCB CN001-2 Engine Control PCB CN001-1
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Signal Waveform
Function No Connection
Printer Ready
+5V 0V
Printer Ready
CN308-22 N.C.
No Connection
CN308-23 ZCIN
No Connection
CN308-24 PSAVE
Energy Save
+5V 0V
CN309 SC PCB Pin No. CN309-1 Signal Name ATRST Destination HDD I/F Signal Waveform Function HDD Reset Signal
+5V 0V RESET
CN309-2
GND
HDD I/F
Ground
0V
CN309-3 ATD7 HDD I/F
+5V 0V
CN309-4
ATD8
HDD I/F
+5V 0V
CN309-5
ATD6
HDD I/F
+5V 0V
CN309-6
ATD9
HDD I/F
+5V 0V
216
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Signal Waveform
Function
+5V 0V
CN309-8
ATD10
HDD I/F
+5V 0V
CN309-9
ATD4
HDD I/F
+5V 0V
CN309-10 ATD11
HDD I/F
+5V 0V
CN309-11 ATD3
HDD I/F
+5V 0V
CN309-12 ATD12
HDD I/F
+5V 0V
CN309-13 ATD2
HDD I/F
+5V 0V
CN309-14 ATD13
HDD I/F
+5V 0V
CN309-15 ATD1
HDD I/F
+5V 0V
CN309-16 ATD14
HDD I/F
+5V 0V
CN309-17 ATD0
HDD I/F
+5V 0V
217
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN309-18 ATD15 HDD I/F
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Signal Waveform
Function
+5V 0V
CN309-19 GND
HDD I/F
Ground
0V
CN309-20 N.C. HDD I/F No Connection
CN309-21 N.C.
HDD I/F
No Connection
CN309-22 GND
HDD I/F
Ground
0V
CN309-23 ATIOWR HDD I/F
+5V 0V
CN309-24 GND
HDD I/F
Ground
0V
CN309-25 ATIORD HDD I/F
+5V 0V
CN309-26 GND
HDD I/F
Ground
0V
CN309-27 ATIORDY HDD I/F
+5V 0V
CN309-28 N.C.
HDD I/F
No Connection
CN309-29 N.C.
HDD I/F
No Connection
218
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN309-30 GND HDD I/F
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Function
0V
CN309-31 ATAINT HDD I/F
+5V 0V
CN309-32 IO16
HDD I/F
+5V 0V
CN309-33 ATA1
HDD I/F
+5V 0V
CN309-34 N.C.
HDD I/F
No Connection
CN309-35 ATA0
HDD I/F
+5V 0V
CN309-36 ATA2
HDD I/F
+5V 0V
CN309-37 ATCS1
HDD I/F
+5V 0V
CN309-38 ATCS0
HDD I/F
+5V 0V
CN309-39 DASP
HDD I/F
+5V 0V
CN309-40 GND
HDD I/F
Ground
0V
219
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
CN330 SC PCB Pin No. CN330-1 Signal Name +24V Destination FXB PCB CN110-1 Signal Waveform
UF-9000 DP-180/190
+24V
CN330-2
+5VP
+5V
CN330-3
GND
Ground
0V
CN330-4 GND FXB PCB CN110-4 Ground
0V
CN330-5 EBC3D[0] FXB PCB CN110-5
+3.3V 0V
CN330-6
EBC3D[1]
+3.3V 0V
CN330-7
EBC3D[2]
+3.3V 0V
CN330-8
EBC3D[3]
+3.3V 0V
CN330-9
EBC3D[4]
+3.3V 0V
CN330-10 EBC3D[5]
+3.3V 0V
CN330-11 EBC3D[6]
+3.3V 0V
220
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN330-12 EBC3D[7] FXB PCB CN110-12
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Signal Waveform
+3.3V 0V
CN330-13 EBC3A[20]
+3.3V 0V
CN330-14 EBC3A[21]
+3.3V 0V
CN330-15 EBC3A[22]
+3.3V 0V
CN330-16 EBC3A[23]
+3.3V 0V
CN330-17 EBC3A[24]
+3.3V 0V
CN330-18 EBC3A[25]
+3.3V 0V
CN330-19 EBC3A[26]
+3.3V 0V
CN330-20 EBC3A[27]
+3.3V 0V
CN330-21 EBC3A[28]
+3.3V 0V
CN330-22 EBC3A[29]
+3.3V 0V
221
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN330-23 EBC3A[30] FXB PCB CN110-23
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Signal Waveform
+3.3V 0V
CN330-24 EBC3A[31]
+3.3V 0V
CN330-25 nFXBSET
FXB Detection
+3.3V 0V
CN330-26 nFXBWUP
Wake Up
+3.3V 0V +3.3V 0V
Wake Up Signal
CN330-27 BZCLK
+3.3V 0V
CN330-29 nEBCOE
+3.3V 0V
Output Enable
CN330-30 nMDMINT
+3.3V 0V
CN330-31 nCSMON
+3.3V 0V
CN330-32 nMDMRST
+3.3V 0V
CN330-33 n5VMTON
+5V 0V
222
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
SC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN330-34 nMVOL0 FXB PCB CN110-34
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Signal Waveform
Function
+5V 0V
CN330-35 nMVOL2
+5V 0V
CN330-36 nMVOL2
+5V 0V
CN330-37 nHKOF5V
+5V 0V
CN330-38 pCMLD
+5V(H) OFF
ON
CML ON / OFF Select Signal H : CML On 0V(L) L : CML Off +5 VDC Power Supply
CN330-39 +5VB
+5V +5V
CN330-40 +3.3V
+3.3V +3.3V
223
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
6.4.3.
P101 Refer to SC PC Board CN305. P102 Refer to SC PC Board CN304. P103 SPC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. P103-1 GND CCD PCB P603-1 Signal Waveform Ground Function
SPC PC Board
UF-9000 DP-180/190
0V
P103-2 GND CCD PCB P603-2 Ground
0V
P103-3 +24V CCD PCB P603-3
Sleep & +24V Shutdown 0V Sleep & +24V Shutdown 0V Sleep & +12V Shutdown 0V Sleep & +12V Shutdown 0V +5V Sleep & Shutdown 0V +5V Sleep & Shutdown 0V 15ns +3.3V 0V
P103-4
+24V
P103-5
+12V
P103-6
+12V
P103-7
VCC
P103-8
INV-SW-1
P103-9
CDSCLK2
P103-10
CCD-TG
15ns
+3.3V 0V
224
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
SPC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. P103-11 GND CCD PCB P603-3
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Function
0V
P103-12 MGND CCD PCB P603-4 Ground
0V
P103-13 CDSCLK1 CCD PCB P603-5
15ns
+3.3V 0V
P103-14
CCD-CP
15ns
+3.3V 0V
P103-15
AFE-SEN
+3.3V 0V
P103-16
CCD-CK2
60ns 60ns
+3.3V 0V
P103-17
GND
Ground
0V
P103-18 CCD-CK1 CCD PCB P603-5
60ns 60ns
+3.3V 0V
P103-19
AFE-SEN
Enable Setting
+3.3V 0V
P103-20
ADCLK
30ns
+3.3V 0V
P103-21
GND
Ground
0V
P103-22 AFE-SCK CCD PCB P603-5
+3.3V 0V
225
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
SPC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. P103-23 DB7 CCD PCB P603-5
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Signal Waveform
+3.3V 0V
P103-24
MODE-SW
P103-25
DB5
Data Signal
P103-26
DB6
+3.3V 0V
Data Signal
P103-27
GND
Ground
0V
P103-28 DB4 CCD PCB P603-5
+3.3V 0V
Data Signal
P103-29
DB3
+3.3V 0V
Data Signal
P103-30
DB2
+3.3V 0V
Data Signal
P103-31
DB1
+3.3V 0V
Data Signal
P103-32
DB0
+3.3V 0V
Data Signal
P104 SPC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. P104-1 +24V ADF PCB PA04-1 Signal Waveform Function +24 VDC Power Supply
226
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
SPC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. P104-2 ADF_PAPER- ADF PCB S2--2 PA04-2
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Signal Waveform
P104-3
+24V
P104-4
P104-5
VCC
P104-6
P104-7
GND
Ground
0V
P104-8 ADFPH0-1 ADF PCB PA04-10
1.2ms 2.0ms
+5V 0V
P104-9
GND
Ground
0V
P104-10 ADFPH1-1 ADF PCB PA04-1
+5V 0V
P104-11
P104-12
ADFPH2-1
P104-13
+3.3V 0V
227
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
SPC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. P104-14 ADFPH3-1 ADF PCB PA04-1
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Signal Waveform
+5V 0V
P104-15
Doc. Detected
+5V 0V
P104-16
ADF_ON_ LINE
P104-17
P104-18
+5VP
P105 Signal SPC PCB Name Pin No. P105-1 OUT1 Destination Scanner Motor-1 Signal Waveform Function Motor Drive Signal
+24V 0V
P105-2
OUT2
Scanner Motor-2
+24V 0V
P105-3
OUT3
Scanner Motor-3
+24V 0V
P105-3
OUT4
Scanner Motor-4
+24V 0V
P106 SPC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. P106-1 VCC Home Detect Sensor-1 Signal Waveform Function +5 VDC Power Supply
228
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
SPC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. P106-2 GND Home Detect Sensor-2
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Function
0V
P106-3 GND Home Detect Sensor-3 Ground
0V
P106-4 HOME Home Detect Sensor-4
+5V 0V
229
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
6.4.4.
CN001 Refer to SC PC Board CN308. CN002 Engine Control PCB Pin No. CN002-1 Signal Name nADJUST
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Signal Waveform
+5V 0V
CN002-2
nVIDEO
+5V 0V
Video Signal
CN002-3
nLDON
+5V 0V
LD Light Enable
CN002-4
5VGND
Ground
0V
CN002-5 5V(LD) LSU PCB Laser Diode-5
+5V
CN002-6
5VGND
Ground
0V
CN002-7 nHSYNC LSU PCB Laser Diode-7
+5V 0V
CN003 Engine Control PCB Pin No. CN003-1 Signal Name +5V Destination Process Interlock SW-1 Signal Waveform Function +5 VDC Power Supply
CN003-2
N.C.
No Connection
230
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Signal Waveform
Function
+5V
CN004 Engine Control PCB Pin No. CN004-1 Signal Name 24VGND Destination 2nd Paper Feed Module PCB CN452-1 Signal Waveform Ground Function
0V
2nd Feeder +5V Motor Enable 0V +5V 0V
2nd Feeder Motor Control Signal
CN004-2
nMOEN_OP 2nd Paper Feed Module PCB CN452-2 CLOCK_OP 2nd Paper Feed Module PCB CN452-2 2nd Paper Feed Module PCB CN452-2
CN004-3
CLOCK
CN004-4
+24V
+24V
CN004-5
nPUCTL_OP 2nd Paper Feed Module PCB CN452-2 nOPTION 2nd Paper Feed Module PCB CN452-2 2nd Paper Feed Module PCB CN452-2 2nd Paper Feed Module PCB CN452-2 2nd Paper Feed Module PCB CN452-2
CN004-6
CN004-7
+5V
CN004-8
nPON_OP
CN004-9
5VGND
Ground
0V
231
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
CN005 Refer to SC PC Board CN301. CN006 Engine Control PCB Pin No. CN006-1 Signal Name +24V Destination Front Cover Safety Interlock SW-3 Front Cover Safety Interlock SW-5 Front Cover Safety Interlock SW-1 Signal Waveform
UF-9000 DP-180/190
CN006-2
24VGND
Ground
0V
Cover Open +24V Sleep & Shutdown +5V
CN006-3
+24VIR
CN007 Engine Control PCB Pin No. CN007-1 Signal Name +5V Destination Thermistor-2 Signal Waveform Function +5 VDC Power Supply
CN007-2
TH
Thermistor-1
5V 0V
CN008 Engine Control PCB Pin No. CN008-1 Signal Name +24VIR Destination HVPS PCB CN501-10 Signal Waveform
Cover Open +24V Sleep & Shutdown +5V
CN008-2
24VGND
Ground
0V
CN008-3 24VGND HVPS PCB CN501-8 Ground
0V
232
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Signal Waveform
+5V 0V
CN008-5
nDBCH
CN008-6
nDB
CN008-7
nTRCTL
+5V 0V +5V 0V
CN008-8
nTR
CN008-9
+5V
CN008-10 5VGND
Ground
0V
CN009 Engine Control PCB Pin No. CN009-1 Signal Name nTESEN Destination Low Toner Sensor CN451-1 Low Toner Sensor CN451-2 Signal Waveform Function Low Toner Sensor Signal
+5V 0V
CN009-2
5VGND
Ground
0V
233
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
CN010 Engine Control PCB Pin No. CN010-1 Signal Name nSNRCLK Destination LSU Motor-1 Signal Waveform
UF-9000 DP-180/190
+5V 0V
CN010-2
nSNRLD
LSU Motor-2
LSU Motor +5V Lock Detection 0V LSU Motor +5V Control Enable 0V
CN010-3
nSNRCTL
LSU Motor-3
CN010-4
24VGND
LSU Motor-4
Ground
0V
CN010-5 +24V LSU Motor-5
CN011 Engine Control PCB Pin No. CN011-1 Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function Pick Up Solenoid Control
Pick Up Solenoid ON
+24V 0V
CN011-2
24VGND
Pick Up Solenoid-2
Ground
0V
CN012 Engine Control PCB Pin No. CN012-1 Signal Name REGSOL_C TL Destination Registration Solenoid -1 Signal Waveform Function Registration Solenoid Control
234
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Function
0V
CN013 Engine Control PCB Pin No. CN013-1 Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function Exit Solenoid Control
Exit Solenoid ON
+24V 0V
CN013-2
24VGND
Exit Solenoid-2
Ground
0V
CN014 Engine Control PCB Pin No. CN014-1 Signal Name +5V Destination Registration/ Paper Detect Sensor PC Board CN401-1 Registration/ Paper Detect Sensor PC Board CN401-2 Registration/ Paper Detect Sensor PC Board CN401-3 Registration/ Paper Detect Sensor PC Board CN401-4 Registration/ Paper Detect Sensor PC Board CN401-5 Signal Waveform Function +5 VDC Power Supply
CN014-2
5VGND
Ground
0V
Ground
CN014-3
5VGND
0V
Registration Sensor ON +5V 0V
Paper Detect Sensor Signal Registration Sensor Signal
CN014-4
nREGSEN
CN014-5
nTOPSEN
235
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
CN015 Engine Control PCB Pin No. CN015-1 Signal Name +5VSP Destination Paper Exit/ADU Paper Jam Sensor PC Board CN402-1 Paper Exit/ADU Paper Jam Sensor PC Board CN402-2 Paper Exit/ADU Paper Jam Sensor PC Board CN402-3 Paper Exit/ADU Paper Jam Sensor PC Board CN402-4 Signal Waveform
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Function
+5V
CN015-2
5VGND
Ground
0V
Ground
CN015-3
5VGND
0V
Exit Sensor ON +5V 0V
EXIT Sensor Signal
CN015-4
nEXITSEN
CN016 Engine Control PCB Pin No. CN016-1 Signal Name 5VGND Destination No Paper Sensor CN450-1 Signal Waveform Ground Function
0V
CN016-2 PNON No Paper Sensor CN450-2
No Paper Sensor ON 0V
+5V
CN016-3
+5VSP
+5V
CN017 Engine Control PCB Pin No. CN017-1 Signal Name +24VIR Destination Main Motor-1 Signal Waveform
Cover Open +24V Sleep & Shutdown +5V
236
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Signal Waveform
Cover Open +24V Sleep & Shutdown +5V
CN017-3
24VGND
Main Motor-3
Ground
0V
CN017-4 24VGND Main Motor-4 Ground
0V
CN017-5 nMMCTL Main Motor-5
Main Motor +5V Control Enable 0V Main Motor +5V Rotation Enable 0V +5V (H) 0V (L)
CN017-6
nMMLD
Main Motor-6
CN017-7
nMMHALF
Main Motor-7
CN018 Engine Control PCB Pin No. CN018-1 Signal Name FANPER Destination Fan Motor-1 Signal Waveform Function +24VDC Fan Power
+24V
CN018-2
24VGND
Fan Motor-2
Ground
0V
CN018-3 FANNERR Fan Motor-3
+5V 0V
237
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
6.4.5.
CN220 Refer to SC PC Board CN306. CN230 PNL1 PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN230-1 LED0 PNL5 PCB CN261-4 Signal Waveform Function PNL LED Control Signal
PNL1 PC Board
UF-9000 DP-180/190
CN230-2
GND
Ground
0V
CN230-3 LED1 PNL5 PCB CN261-5
CN230-4
KIN6
CN230-5
LED2
CN230-6
SCN[0]
CN230-7
LED3
CN230-8
SCN[1]
CN230-9
LED4
CN230-10 KIN5
CN230-11 LED5
238
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
PNL1 PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN230-12 KIN4 PNL5 PCB CN264-5
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Signal Waveform
Key Pressed
+3.3V 0V
CN230-13 LEDCT2
+5V 0V LED ON
+3.3V 0V
CN230-14 KIN3
Key Pressed
CN230-15 LEDCT3
CN230-16 SCN[2]
Key Scan
CN230-17 LEDCT4
CN230-18 BAT+
Lithium Battery
CN231 PNL1 PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN231-1 +SLP PNL2 PCB CN256-1 Signal Waveform Function Energy Saver Lamp LED Power Supply
+5VP
CN231-2
nLEDSLP
+5VP 0V
CN231-3
nSLPKY
+3.3V PUSH 0V
CN231-4
GND
Ground
0V
239
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
PNL1 PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN231-5 LEDCT0 PNL2 PCB CN256-5
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Signal Waveform
+5V 0V LED ON
CN231-6
N.C.
No Connection
CN231-7
LEDCT1
CN231-8
nSCNDOR
ADF Closed
CN231-9
LED6
CN231-10 SCN[2]
CN231-11 SCN[0]
Key Scan
CN231-12 SCN[1]
Key Scan
CN232 PNL1 PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN232-1 SCN[4] PNL3 PCB CN262-1 CN232-2 SCN[5] PNL3 PCB CN262-2 PNL3 PCB CN262-3 Signal Waveform Function PNL Key Signal (Scan Line)
Key Scan
Key Scan
CN232-3
SCN[3]
Key Scan
240
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
PNL1 PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN232-4 SCN[6] PNL3 PCB CN262-4 CN232-5 KIN3 PNL3 PCB CN262-5
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Signal Waveform
Key Scan
+3.3V 0V +3.3V 0V
Key Pressed
CN232-6
N.C.
No Connection
CN232-7
KIN2
Key Pressed
CN232-8
KIN7
Key Pressed
CN232-9
KIN1
Key Pressed
CN232-10 KIN0
Key Pressed
CN233 PNL1 PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN233-1 +DAT PNL2 PCB CN252-1 Signal Waveform Function DATA Lamp LED Power Supply
+24V 0V
CN233-2
N.C.
No Connection
CN233-3
+ALM
+24V 0V
CN233-4
SCN[5]
Key Scan
+3.3V 0V
241
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
PNL1 PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN233-5 +ACT PNL2 PCB CN252-5
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Signal Waveform
+24V 0V
CN233-6
SCN[6]
Key Scan
+3.3V 0V +3.3V 0V
CN233-7
nLEDACT
CN233-8
SCN[7]
Key Scan
+3.3V 0V +3.3V 0V
CN233-9
nLEDALM
CN233-10 LEDCT0
CN233-11 nLEDAT
CN233-12 LED9
OPEN LED Light 0V +5V 0V LED ON OPEN LED Light 0V +5V 0V LED ON OPEN LED Light 0V
CN233-13 LEDCT4
CN233-14 LED8
CN233-15 LEDCT3
CN233-16 LED7
242
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
PNL1 PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN233-17 LEDCT2 PNL2 PCB CN252-17
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Signal Waveform
CN233-18 LEDCT1
CN234 PNL1 PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN234-1 KIN4 PNL2 PCB CN255-1 Signal Waveform Function PNL Key Signal (Key Line)
Key Pressed
CN234-2
KIN5
Key Pressed
CN234-3
KIN3
Key Pressed
CN234-4
KIN6
Key Pressed
CN234-5
KIN2
Key Pressed
CN234-6
KIN7
Key Pressed
CN234-7
KIN1
Key Pressed
CN234-8
SCN[11]
Key Scan
CN234-9
KIN0
Key Pressed
243
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
PNL1 PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN234-10 SCN[10] PNL2 PCB CN255-10 CN234-11 SCN[8] PNL2 PCB CN255-11 PNL2 PCB CN255-12 PNL2 PCB CN255-13
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Signal Waveform
Key Scan
Key Scan
CN234-12 SCN[9]
Key Scan
CN234-13 N.C.
No Connection
CN234-14 GND
Ground
0V
244
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
6.4.6.
CN251
PNL2 PC Board
UF-9000 DP-180/190
PNL2 PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN251-1 LEDCT0 PNL3 PCB CN263-1
Signal Waveform
+5V 0V LED ON OPEN LED Light 0V OPEN LED Light 0V Key Pressed +3.3V 0V +3.3V 0V
CN251-2
LED8
CN251-3
LED9
CN251-4
KIN4
CN251-5
KIN6
Key Pressed
CN252 Refer to PNL1 PC Board CN233. CN255 Refer to PNL1 PC Board CN234. CN256 Refer to PNL1 PC Board CN231. CN257 PNL2 PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN257-1 nBOOK Scanner Door Sensor Signal Waveform Function ADF Open / Close Detection Signal
ADF Closed
+3.3V 0V
CN257-2
GND
Ground
0V
245
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
6.4.7.
CN262 Refer to PNL1 PC Board CN232. CN263 Refer to PNL2 PC Board CN251.
PNL3 PC Board
UF-9000 DP-180/190
6.4.8.
CN261 Refer to PNL1 PC Board CN230. CN264 Refer to PNL1 PC Board CN230.
PNL5 PC Board
246
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
6.4.9.
PA01
ADF PC Board
UF-9000 DP-180/190
ADF PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. PA01-1 OUT1 ADF Motor-1
Signal Waveform
+24V 0V
PA01-2
OUT2
ADF Motor-2
+24V 0V
PA01-3
OUT3
ADF Motor-3
+24V 0V
PA01-4
OUT4
ADF Motor-4
+24V 0V
PA02 ADF PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. PA02-1 ADF Paper Sensor-1 PAPER_S1 Signal Waveform Function Paper Sensor Signal
Doc. Detected
+5V 0V
PA02-2
GND
Paper Sensor-2
Ground
0V
PA02-3 GND Paper Sensor-3 Ground
0V
PA02-4 +5VP Paper Sensor-4
PA03 ADF PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. PA03-1 ADF Regist Sensor-1 PAPER_S2 Signal Waveform Function Paper Register Sensor Signal
Document at regist 1
+5V 0V
247
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
ADF PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. PA03-2 GND Regist Sensor-2
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Function
0V
PA03-3 GND Regist Sensor-3 Ground
0V
PA03-4 VCC Regist Sensor-4
PA04 Refer to SPC PC Board P104. PA05 ADF PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. PA05-1 ADF_ Cover Sensor-1 COVER Signal Waveform Function ADF Cover Detection Signal
Cover Close
+5V 0V
PA05-2
GND
Cover Sensor-2
Ground
0V
PA08 ADF PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. PA08-1 GND STAMP Solenoid1 Signal Waveform Ground Function
0V
PA08-2 ADF_STAMP STAMP Solenoid2
+24V Stamp ON 0V
248
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
CN110 Refer to SC PC Board CN330. CN113 FXB PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN113-1 +5VP MJR PCB CN25-1 Signal Waveform Function
+5V
CN113-2
GND
Ground
0V
CN114 FXB PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN114-1 pSPKOT Speaker Signal Waveform Function Line Signal, Dial Tone
CN114-2
GND
Speaker
Ground
0V
249
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
6.4.11.
CN401 Refer to Engine Control PC Board CN014. CN402 Refer to Engine Control PC Board CN015.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
250
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Function
0V
2nd Feeder +5V Motor Enable 0V 2nd Feeder +5V No Paper Detection 0V 2nd Feeder Detection +5V 0V
2nd Feeder Paper Pick up Control 2nd Feeder Motor Control Signal
CN453-2
nMOEN_OP 2nd Feeder PC Board CN602-1 nPON_OP 2nd Feeder PC Board CN602-1 2nd Feeder PC Board CN602-1
CN453-3
CN453-4
nOPTION
CN453-5
nPUCTL_OP 2nd Feeder PC Board CN602-1 24VGND 2nd Feeder PC Board CN602-1 2nd Feeder PC Board CN602-1 2nd Feeder PC Board CN602-1 2nd Feeder PC Board CN602-1
CN453-6
Ground
0V
CN453-7
+5V
+5V
CN453-8
+24V
+24V
CN453-9
CLOCK_OP
+5V 0V
CLOCK
251
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
6.4.16. HVPS
UF-9000 DP-180/190
6.4.17. LVPS
CN101 Refer to SC PC Board CN300. CN102 LVPS Pin No. CN102-1 Signal Name GND Destination DC PCB CN141-3 Signal Waveform Ground Function
0V
CN102-3 +24V DC PCB CN141-1
+24V
CN2 LVPS Pin No. CN2-1 Signal Name ACL Destination LVPS CN2-1 Signal Waveform Function AC Power Supply (Live)
AC120V (AC200-240V)
CN2-3 ACN LVPS CN2-3 AC Power Supply (Neutral)
AC120V (AC200-240V)
252
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
6.4.18. DC PC Board
CN141 Refer to LVPS CN102. CN143 DC PCB Signal Name Destination Pin No. CN143-12 GND HDD I/F Signal Waveform Ground
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Function
0V
CN143-13 +5VP HDD I/F
+5V
CN143-14 +5VP
HDD I/F
+5V
CN143-15 +5VP
HDD I/F
+5V
253
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
CN600-2
+24V
CN600-3
CN600-4
NA
CN600-5
CN600-6
NB
CN601 2nd Feeder PCB Pin No. CN601-1 Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function Pick Up Solenoid Control
Pick Up Solenoid ON
+24V 0V
CN601-2
+24V
Pick Up Solenoid-2
254
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
7 Installation
7.1. Set Up Precautions
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Before you begin the installation, read these entire instructions. You must locate an appropriate site (firm and leveled surface) for the installation. Reading this section assists you with the decision making process. Machine performance and the copy quality is subject to and dependant on environmental conditions. To maintain good performance, quality, and safe operation, observe the following precautions: 1. For safe operation and to avoid trouble, do not install the system under the following conditions: Extremely high or low temperature and humidity. Ambient conditions Temperature: 50 - 86 F (10 - 30 C) Relative humidity: 30 - 80 % Sudden changes in temperature or humidity Exposed to direct sunlight Dusty environment Poorly ventilated location Exposed to chemical gases (such as ammonia gas) Exposed to strong vibration Exposed to direct air current (ex. Air conditioner vent) 2. The weight of the machine (options not included) is as follows: UF-9000, DP-180/190: Approx. 48.5 lb (22 kg) 3. The maximum power consumption is 900 W for 120 VAC, or 1.0 kW for 220-240 VAC. Depending on the product destination, the wall outlet must be rated for 120 VAC or 220-240 VAC accordingly. It must also be protected for at least 15 Amps for 120 VAC, or 10 Amps for 220-240 VAC. If you are in doubt about a power source, ensure that a qualified electrician checks the outlet. Do not connect any other devices to the wall outlet designated for this machine. (Do not use an extension cord) 4. Make sure the outlet is properly grounded. (Do not ground to gas or water pipe) 5. The machine should be installed in a well-ventilated area to minimize the ozone density in the air. 6. This machine has ventilation openings on the side and rear, which must remain unobstructed for safe operation. The machine should be located at least 3.94 inches (100 mm) from the wall. Obstructing the ventilation openings could present a fire hazard. Using the space requirements shown the following page, ensures that the machine has the ventilation it requires and that you have the space needed for replacing the supplies.
255
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
Space Requirements
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Main Unit
3.94 in (100 mm)
18.19 in (462 mm) 3.94 in (100 mm) 3.94 in (100 mm) 14.57 in (370 mm) 3.94 in (100 mm) 26.06 in (662 mm) 3.94 in (100 mm) 18.19 in (462 mm) 3.94 in (100 mm) 14.57 in (370 mm) 3.94 in (100 mm) 30.39 in (772 mm)
Ver. 3.0
256
APR 2006
7.2.
Unpacking
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Visually check the condition and contents of the box for completeness, or any shipping damage before installation. Remove all filament tapes, and the packing materials used to secure the Unit during shipment. Caution: Depending on your machine's model, it may weight approximately up to 48.5 lb (22 kg). To prevent injuries, use the appropriate number of personnel and the proper equipment to lift or move the machine. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Note: Qty. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Description Main Unit Rear Paper Tray Cover Drum Unit Toner Cartridge Hole Cover AC Power Cord Telephone Line Cable Operating Instructions Quick Guide Operating Instructions CD Panasonic-DMS CD License Agreement Directory Holder Warranty Information Sheet Installation Instructions Remarks
This document
1. The part number(s) may differ depending on the Destination. 2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
257
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
7.3.
Installation Procedure
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Note: 1. Refer to each individual Installation Instructions when installing other Options. 2. The following machine illustrations, depict a UF-9000 with the USA standard configuration. 3. The scanner is held in place by a Shipping Bracket to prevent damage during transit. Do Not turn the Power Switch ON before unlocking the scanner. 4. Please make sure to read the Important Note! at the end of these Installation Instructions.
7.3.1.
Installation Procedure
<Remove the Shipping Materials> (1) Remove the Shipping Rubber Cushion.
(2) Turn the Shipping Bracket in either direction of the arrow to unlock and remove the bracket. (To facilitate removal, open the ADF and observe the position of the bracket through the Platen Glass) Caution: Do Not turn the Power Switch ON before unlocking the scanner. Note: Store the Shipping Materials (Rubber Cushion and Shipping Bracket) in a safe place for future use.
258
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
<For USA/Canada/UK/Germany/France, and other Destinations> Skip to Step (6) The Toner Label is attached in the Factory. <For Euro Special Destinations only, DP-180-AMR/EHR/EPR/YAR/YCR> (5) Attach the Toner Label in the preferred language to the inside of the Cover as illustrated.
(6) Carefully remove the Protective Sheet from the Drum Unit. Caution: Exercise caution not to scratch the surface of the OPC Drum (Green), and not to touch it with bare hands. The OPC Drum is sensitive to light. To prevent optical exposure problems, do not expose the OPC Drum to direct sunlight or bright light. Even if it is a fluorescent lamp, approx.1000 lm/m2 (1000 lx).
259
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
(7) Shake the Toner Cartridge 10 to 15 times to loosen the contents. (8) Remove the Protective Cover.
(9) Insert the side pins of the Toner Cartridge into the slots of the Drum Unit. (10) Push down the Toner Cartridge to lock in place as illustrated.
(12) Push down to lock in place as illustrated. (13) Close the Front Cover.
260
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
(14) Remove the Caution Label covering the AC Inlet on the machine. (15) Plug the AC Power Cord. (16) Connect one end of the Line Cable (Telephone) to the LINE Jack on the back side of the machine, and the other end to the Telephone Jack on the wall. (17) If required, connect the LAN / USB Cable (not included). (18) Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position and confirm that the Scanner is unlocked and moves freely. Note: Perform the following adjustments after the machine has warmed up and displays: <For USA / Canada etc> Skip to Step (23)
DP-180 (**)
***
261
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
<Installing the Hole Cover> (24) Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position. (25) Open the ADF and observe the position of the Hole Cover through the Platen Glass, to facilitate installation. (26) Install the Hole Cover. (27) Turn the Hole Cover counterclockwise by pushing from the bottom and ensure that it is positioned as illustrated. Note: If the Hole Cover position is incorrectly positioned, the scanner will not work properly. (28) Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position, and reconfirm that the Scanner still moves freely.
(29) Load paper into the Paper Tray. Caution: Make sure that the paper is set under the Ribs and that it does not exceed the Max. Level Indicator. You can load up to 250 sheets (20 lb / 75 g/m2). (30) Make a copy on the Platen to ensure the machine works properly.
262
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
7.4. User Authentication Function Confirmation (Specified Destinations only) (Incorporated into production, starting with Serial No. prefix CF [March 2006] and above)
UF-9000 DP-180/190
If your customer requires User Authentication, first verify whether your machine has this feature, or verify that the machine's Firmware version is 4 or later by following the steps below. Once the version is confirmed, setup the User Authentication feature by referring to the Operating Instructions (For User Authentication).
1. Press the COPY key to enter the Copy Function Mode. 2. Press the FUNCTION key to enter the Function Mode. 3. Press the 1 key, and then press SET key to enter the General Settings Mode. 4. Press the 9 key to enter the Key Operator Mode. 5. Input the 3 Digit Code, and then press SET key. (Default setting 000) 6. Press the 3 key twice, if 33 USER AUTH 1:COPY displays on the LCD, this signifies that User Authentication is available on the machine. 7. Press the RESET key, to exit the General Settings mode. 8. If 33 USER AUTH 1:COPY is not displayed on the LCD, then you cannot add this feature. 1. Press the COPY key to enter the Copy Function Mode. 2. Press the FUNCTION key to enter the Function Mode. 3. Press the 1 key, and then press SET key to enter the General Settings Mode. 4. Press the 9 key to enter the Key Operator Mode. 5. Input the 3 Digit Code, and then press SET key. (Default setting 000) 6. Press the 0 key, and then press SET key. 7. Press the SET key, to print the GENERAL SETTINGS LIST. 8. Verify the Footer of the printed List. For example ******* DP-190 v4 *******. 9. If the firmware is below version 4 (For example ******* DP-190 *******), then you cannot add this feature.
7.4.2. Checking the Firmware Version with the General Settings List
Important Note!
The Default setting of Fax Parameter No. 177 XMT FILE TYPE for this machine is 2: PDF, as PDF has become the industry standard for exchanging documents from computer to computer (Scan-to-Email feature). However, this PDF format cannot be used for Internet Faxing (i.e. from an Internet Fax machine to an Internet Fax machine) as current Internet Fax Specifications do not support PDF file format. Internet Faxing requires TIFF-F file format. If your customers requirements are mainly Internet Faxing, please change the Fax Parameter No. 177 XMT FILE TYPE to 1: TIFF/JPEG.
If your customer uses both Internet Fax and Scan-to-Email and needs to switch file formats on the fly, please explain to them how to use the Select Mode (F8-6) XMT FILE TYPE/NAME for individual transmissions. After the transmission is completed, the machine returns to its Default setting. Refer to the Operating Instructions (For Facsimile and Internet Fax/Email) included on the CD for DP-180/190 and on the printed copy for UF-9000.
263
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
To use PCL (DA-PC190: UF-9000; DA-PC188: DP-180/190) or PS (DA-MC190: UF-9000; DA-MC188: DP-180/190) option individually, changing to Type B or Type D SC firmware is required. The required firmware is on the CD included with the options. Note: The 8 MB Expansion Board (DA-EM600) must be installed for the printer controllers above to function. The only time a DA-EM600 is needed is if you are installing the PostScript (PS) or PCL option. There will never be a need for 2 of these, even if there are other options, such as Fax, added. Before proceeding, it is important to determine the Final Configuration of your machine in order to correctly identify the required firmware from the table below. Carefully read, and follow the Installation Instructions for the appropriate option. The firmware for SC, and SPC must be updated in this sequence as a set. Please update the firmware with the latest version as a set by referring to the following table. Firmware Version Table (Select according to machine's production date) Important Notice The Firmware in the tables below are not interchangeable. Firmware for machines with Serial No. prefix CF [March 2006] and above, cannot be used on machines with Serial No. prefix BF [February 2006] and below for USA/Canada (may differ for other destinations). New Navy Blue Color Light Blue Color
For all DP-180/190, and UF-9000 starting with Serial No. prefix CF [March 2006], and above (Navy Blue Control Panel) use the following firmware: < Firmware Code File: UF-9000_AUR_xxxxxxxx.exe or DP-190_180_AUR_xxxxxxxx.exe >
Standard Firmware User Auth. (SC = Type A) SC UF-9000 DP-180/190 PCL Firmware User Auth. (SC = Type B) PostScript Firmware User Auth. (SC = Type D)
DX-TrirAxVxxxxx_xx DP-TrirAxVxxxxx_xx
DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxx Not Required
DX-TrirBxVxxxxx_xx DP-TrirBxVxxxxx_xx
Required
DX-TrirDxVxxxxx_xx DP-TrirDxVxxxxx_xx
Required
264
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
For all previous DP-180/190, and UF-9000 with Serial No. prefix BF [February 2006] and below (Light Blue Control Panel) use the following firmware: < Firmware Code File: UF-9000_AU_xxxxxxxx.exe or DP-190_180_AU_xxxxxxxx.exe >
Standard Firmware (SC = Type A) PCL Firmware (SC = Type B) PostScript Firmware (SC = Type D)
UF-9000 DP180/190
SC
UF-9000 DP-180/190
DX-TriAxVxxxxx_xx DP-TriAxVxxxxx_xx
DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxx Not Required
DX-TriBxVxxxxx_xx DP-TriBxVxxxxx_xx
Required
DX-TriDxVxxxxx_xx DP-TriDxVxxxxx_xx
Required
8.1.1.
The firmware code can be easily updated when the main unit is connected to a LAN. The Network Firmware Update Tool can also be used by connecting to the machine using a crossover cable, if the unit is not connected to a LAN. 1) Install the Network Firmware Update Tool to your PC The option CD-ROM includes the Network Firmware Update Tool, and the Main Unit Firmware Code. Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Network Firmware Update Tool. The installation password is "workio". Operating Instructions: \xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\NwFirmup OI.pdf (Refer to the NW Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD) Setup: \xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\Setup\Setup.exe 2) Preparing the Firmware Code Double click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File, and copy the Firmware Code File on the CD-ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked. Example: From: Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.bat [Navy Blue Control Panel] Firmware Code File: UF-9000_AUR_xxxxxxxx.exe or DP-190_180_AUR_xxxxxxxx.exe [Light Blue Control Panel] Firmware Code File: To: Firmware Data Folder: UF-9000_AU_xxxxxxxx.exe or DP-190_180_AU_xxxxxxxx.exe C:\ Panasonic \ Panasonic-FUP \ Data
Updating through a LAN Port (The Quickest, and Most Easiest Method)
3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware Upgrade Make sure the unit's Key Operator Password is the same as the tool's password. Make sure the unit is in an idle state (e.g. not making copies, not printing, etc.). 4) Upgrading the Main Unit's Firmware Code Start the Network Firmware Update Tool, and select the following Firmware Code Folders in the C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder, and then follow the display instructions to upgrade the Main Unit's Firmware Codes.
265
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
The Firmware in the table below are not interchangeable. Firmware for machines with Serial No. prefix CF [March 2006] and above for USA/Canada (may differ for other destinations). (Navy Blue Control Panel), cannot be used on machines with Serial No. prefix BF [February 2006] and below for USA/Canada (may differ for other destinations). (Light Blue Control Panel).
Parent Firmware File Folder \ UF-9000_AUR_xxxxxx (Navy Blue Control Panel) Sub Firmware File Folder \ SC_STD \ DX-TrirAxVxxxxx_xx \ SC_PCL \ DX-TrirBxVxxxxx_xx \ SC_PS \ DX-TrirDxVxxxxx_xx \ SPC \ DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxx \ SC_STD \ DX-TriAxVxxxxx_xx \ SC_PCL \ DX-TriBxVxxxxx_xx \ SC_PS \ DX-TriDxVxxxxx_xx \ SPC \ DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxx \ SC_STD \ DP-TrirAxVxxxxx_xx \ SC_PCL \ DP-TrirBxVxxxxx_xx \ SC_PS \ DP-TrirDxVxxxxx_xx \ SPC \ DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxx \ SC_STD \ DP-TriAxVxxxxx_xx \ SC_PCL \ DP-TriBxVxxxxx_xx \ SC_PS \ DP-TriDxVxxxxx_xx \ SPC \ DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxx User Authentication X X X Transferring Order 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2
UF-9000 DP-180/190
X X X
When you select the Parent Folder, the following Firmware Type window appears. Proper Sub File Folders are selected automatically by selecting the Firmware Type. The transferring order is set up automatically.
Note: 1. Manual mode must be used, when updating the designated version of the firmware or changing the type of the firmware. Please refer to the Section 2.2, "Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool, File Selection Tab" of the Operating Instructions. 2. While updating the firmware code, the display may become garbled, however, it will return to normal upon completion of the firmware update. 3. If the firmware update fails, and the unit does not boot up, the Network Firmware Update Tool will not be able to transfer the firmware code. If this occurs, please refer to the next section "Updating through the USB Port", and use the Local Firmware Update Tool to recover the unit. 4. The suffix "_xx" for the Folder Name or File Name may not exist depending on the destination location.
266
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
8.1.2.
If the device is not connected to the LAN, upgrade the firmware code using the USB Port. 1) Install the Local Firmware Update Tool to your PC The option CD-ROM includes the Local Firmware Update Tool, and the Main Unit Firmware Code. Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Local Firmware Update Tool. Operating Instructions: \xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\FIRMUP OI.pdf (Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD) Setup: \xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\Setup\Setup.exe 2) Preparing the Firmware Code Double click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File, and copy the Firmware Code File on the CD-ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked. Example: From: Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.bat [Navy Blue Control Panel] Firmware Code File: UF-9000_AUR_xxxxxxxx.exe or DP-190_180_AUR_xxxxxxxx.exe [Light Blue Control Panel] Firmware Code File: To: Firmware Data Folder: UF-9000_AU_xxxxxxxx.exe or DP-190_180_AU_xxxxxxxx.exe C:\ Panasonic \ Panasonic-FUP \ Data
UF-9000 DP180/190
3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware Upgrade Important: DO NOT connect the USB Cable yet. Enter into Test Mode F9-07-01 to enable the unit to accept the programming code from the USB Port. Now connect the USB Cable between the Unit, and PC. Repeat the above steps if there are additional firmware code files to be updated. 4) Upgrading the Main Unit's Firmware Code Start the Local Firmware Update Tool, and select the following Firmware Code Parent File Folder in the C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder, and select the Firmware Code Type then follow the display instructions to upgrade the Main Unit's Firmware Codes. You must process each firmware file separately in this manner, and sequence.
267
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
The Firmware in the table below are not interchangeable. Firmware for machines with Serial No. prefix CF [March 2006] and above for USA/Canada (may differ for other destinations). (Navy Blue Control Panel), cannot be used on machines with Serial No. prefix BF [February 2006] and below for USA/Canada (may differ for other destinations). (Light Blue Control Panel).
Parent Firmware File Folder \ UF-9000_AUR_xxxxxx (Navy Blue Control Panel) Sub Firmware File Folder \ SC_STD \ DX-TrirAxVxxxxx_xx \ SC_PCL \ DX-TrirBxVxxxxx_xx Firmware File DX-TrirAxVxxxxx-xx.bin DX-TrirBxVxxxxx_xx.bin DX-TrirCxVxxxxxa_xx.bin DX-TrirCxVxxxxxb.bin DX-TrirDxVxxxxx_xx.bin DX-TrirExVxxxxxa_xx.bin DX-TrirExVxxxxxb.bin DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxxx.bin DX-TriAxVxxxxx-xx.bin DX-TriBxVxxxxx_xx.bin DX-TriCxVxxxxxa_xx.bin DX-TriCxVxxxxxb.bin DX-TriDxVxxxxx_xx.bin DX-TriExVxxxxxa_xx.bin DX-TriExVxxxxxb.bin DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxxx.bin DP-TrirAxVxxxxx-xx.bin DP-TrirBxVxxxxx_xx.bin DP-TrirCxVxxxxxa_xx.bin DP-TrirCxVxxxxxb.bin DP-TrirDxVxxxxx_xx.bin DP-TrirExVxxxxxa_xx.bin DP-TrirExVxxxxxb.bin DP-180_190SPCAxVxxxxxx.bin DP-TriAxVxxxxx-xx.bin DP-TriBxVxxxxx_xx.bin DP-TriCxVxxxxxa_xx.bin DP-TriCxVxxxxxb.bin DP-TriDxVxxxxx_xx.bin DP-TriExVxxxxxa_xx.bin DP-TriExVxxxxxb.bin DP-180_190SPCAxVxxxxxx.bin
UF-9000 DP-180/190
\ SC_PS \ DX-TrirDxVxxxxx_xx
\ SPC \ DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxx
\ UF-9000_AU_xxxxxx (Light Blue Control Panel) \ SC_STD \ DX-TriAxVxxxxx_xx \ SC_PCL \ DX-TriBxVxxxxx_xx
Transferring Order 1 1-1 1-2 1-3 1-1 1-2 1-3 2 1 1-1 1-2 1-3 1-1 1-2 1-3 2 1 1-1 1-2 1-3 1-1 1-2 1-3 2 1 1-1 1-2 1-3 1-1 1-2 1-3 2
\ SC_PS \ DX-TriDxVxxxxx_xx
\ SC_PS \ DP-TrirDxVxxxxx_xx
\ SPC \ DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxx
\ DP-190_180_xx_xxxxxx (Light Blue Control Panel) \ SC_STD \ DP-TriAxVxxxxx_xx \ SC_PCL \ DP-TriBxVxxxxx_xx
\ SC_PS \ DP-TriDxVxxxxx_xx
\ SPC \ DX-TRI-SAxVxxxxx
When you select the Parent Folder, the following Firmware Type window appears. Proper Firmware Files are selected automatically by selecting the Firmware Type. The transferring order is set up automatically.
Note: 1. While updating the firmware code, the display may become garbled, however, it will return to normal upon completion of the firmware update. 2. Please refer to the service manual for additional details. 3. The suffix "_xx" for the Folder Name or File Name may not exist depending on the destination location.
268
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
8.1.3.
Updating the Firmware using the Master Firmware Card (Alternate method) 1. Before starting, print the F5/F6 Parameters List (Copy Service Mode F9-03-00). 2. Turn the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the OFF position. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord.) 3. Install the appropriate Master Firmware Card into the machine. 4. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position. 5. Press FUNCTION, ORIGINAL SIZE keys, and then Key 3 on the keypad sequentially. 6. Perform the Copy Service Mode F9-07-00 (Update From Master Card). 7. The firmware is copied into the machine. 8. After the update is completed, the machine reboots itself, and returns to standby. 9. Turn the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the OFF position. 10. Remove the Master Firmware Card from the machine. 11. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position. 12. Reprogram the F5 & F6 Parameters according to the lists printed in Step 1 above if the settings are other than factory default. Note: After the update is completed, the machine reboots itself, and returns to standby mode. Repeat the above steps if there are additional firmware code files to be updated. Confirm that the update was successfully completed by checking the Firmware Version with F9 Parameters F9-02-xx. Caution: If the unit does not boot up properly in step 8, refer to Service Manual 3.5.8. (Firmware Emergency Recovery) Creating a Master Firmware Card A. Utilizing the Firmware Update Kit 1) Install the Local Firmware Update Tool to your PC The option CD-ROM includes the Local Firmware Update Tool, and the Main Unit Firmware Code. Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Local Firmware Update Tool. Operating Instructions: \xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\FIRMUP OI.pdf (Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD) Setup: \xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\Setup\Setup.exe 2) Preparing the Firmware Code Double click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File, and copy the Firmware Code File on the CD-ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked. Example: From: Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.bat [Navy Blue Control Panel] Firmware Code File: UF-9000_AUR_xxxxxxxx.exe or DP-190_180_AUR_xxxxxxxx.exe [Light Blue Control Panel] Firmware Code File: To: Firmware Data Folder: UF-9000_AU_xxxxxxxx.exe or DP-190_180_AU_xxxxxxxx.exe C:\ Panasonic \ Panasonic-FUP \ Data
UF-9000 DP180/190
8.1.3.1.
269
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Programming Master Firmware Card Important: DO NOT connect the USB Cable yet. 1. Turn the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the OFF position. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord.) 2. Insert/Remove the Flash Memory Card (4 MB or 8 MB) into/from the machine. 3. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position. 4. Press FUNCTION, ORIGINAL SIZE keys, and then Key 3 on the keypad sequentially. 5. Perform the Update Program Card Mode F9-09 (Update Program Card). The unit is now ready to accept the firmware code from the USB Port. Now connect the USB Cable between the Unit, and PC. (Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD) Repeat the above steps if there are additional master firmware cards to be programmed.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
B. Copying the Firmware from an Existing Machine using a Flash Memory Card (4 MB or 8 MB) 1. Turn the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the OFF position. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord.) 2. Install a Flash Memory Card (4 MB or 8 MB) into the machine. 3. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position. 4. Press FUNCTION, ORIGINAL SIZE keys, and then Key 3 on the keypad sequentially. 5. Perform the Copy Service Mode F9-08 (Program Backup). 6. The firmware is copied into the Flash Memory Card. 7. After the backup is completed, press "STOP" first, and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to return to standby. 8. Turn the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the OFF position. 9. Remove the Master Firmware Card that you just created from the machine. 10. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position. 11. Use this Master Firmware Card to update the firmware on other machines.
8.1.3.2.
Erasing the Master Firmware Card 1. Turn the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the OFF position. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord.) 2. Install the Master Firmware Card into the machine. 3. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position. 4. Press FUNCTION, ORIGINAL SIZE keys, and then Key 3 on the keypad sequentially. 5. Perform the Service Mode F9-09 (Update Program Card). 6. After the Flash Memory Card is erased, machine prompts READY TO PROGRAM PRESS SET TO START. Press STOP. 7. Press "STOP" first, and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to return to standby. 8. Turn the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the OFF position. 9. Remove the blank Flash Memory Card from the machine. 10. Repeat from Step 2 above if you are erasing another Master Firmware Card.
270
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
8.1.4. User Authentication Function Confirmation (Specified Destinations only) (Incorporated into production, starting with Serial No. prefix CF [March 2006] and above)
UF-9000 DP180/190
If your customer requires User Authentication, first verify whether your machine has this feature, or verify that the machine's Firmware version is 4 or later by following the steps below. If the version is below 4, then you cannot add this feature. Once the version is confirmed, setup the User Authentication feature by referring to the Operating Instructions (For User Authentication).
8.1.4.1.
1. Press the COPY key to enter the Copy Function Mode. 2. Press the FUNCTION key to enter the Function Mode. 3. Press the 1 key, and then press SET key to enter the General Settings Mode. 4. Press the 9 key to enter the Key Operator Mode. 5. Input the 3 Digit Code, and then press SET key. (Default setting 000) 6. Press the 3 key twice, if 33 USER AUTH 1:COPY displays on the LCD, this signifies that User Authentication is available on the machine. 7. Press the RESET key, to exit the General Settings mode. 8. If 33 USER AUTH 1:COPY is not displayed on the LCD, then you cannot add this feature.
8.1.4.2.
1. Press the COPY key to enter the Copy Function Mode. 2. Press the FUNCTION key to enter the Function Mode. 3. Press the 1 key, and then press SET key to enter the General Settings Mode. 4. Press the 9 key to enter the Key Operator Mode. 5. Input the 3 Digit Code, and then press SET key. (Default setting 000) 6. Press the 0 key, and then press SET key. 7. Press the SET key, to print the GENERAL SETTINGS LIST. 8. Verify the Footer of the printed List. For example ******* DP-190 v4 *******. 9. If the firmware is below version 4 (For example ******* DP-190 *******), then you cannot add this feature.
271
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
8.2.
8.2.1.
Installing the Printer Controller Module for PCL6 (DA-PC190: UF-9000; DA-PC188: DP-180/190)
Contents
Qty. 1 1 1 1 1 Description Hardware Key Software CD License Agreement Installation Instructions Remarks PCL KEY Includes Operating Instructions For USA and Canada only For Other Destinations This document
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Note: 1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination. 2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.2.2.
Installation
1. Before installing this option, make sure the Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600) is installed into (CN327) [Lower] on the SC PC Board first. Refer to the Installation Instructions of the Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600). 2. Install the Hardware Key by following the steps below. CAUTION! Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord.) (1) Remove the Rear Paper Tray Cover.
272
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP180/190
(4) Disconnect the Speaker Harness. (5) Release the Harness from the Harness Clamp.
(8) Install the Hardware Key into the CN324 connector on the SC PC Board. Note: The connector is keyed, to prevent damage to the SC PC Board, install the Hardware Key as illustrated. Do not force the Hardware Key into the connector if facing the wrong way. (9) Proceed with the installation of other options. If finished, reinstall all Harnesses, and Covers. (10) Plug the AC Power Cord, and turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position. (11) Reconnect the Telephone Line Cable if it was disconnected. (12) Update the firmware of the unit to the PCL Option firmware. Refer to the attached "Service Notes". (13) Install the PCL6 Software into the PC with the Operating Instructions by following the prompts of the Installation Wizard.
273
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
8.3.
8.3.1.
Installing the Printer Controller Module for PS / PCL6 (DA-MC190: UF-9000; DA-MC188: DP-180/190)
Contents
Qty. 1 1 1 1 1 1 Description Hardware Key Software CD Adobe PostScript 3 Label License Agreement Installation Instructions Remarks PS KEY Includes Operating Instructions For USA and Canada only For Adobe PostScript Driver This document
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Note: 1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination. 2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.3.2.
Installation
1. Before installing this option, make sure the Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600) is installed into (CN327) [Lower] on the SC PC Board first. Refer to the Installation Instructions of the Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600). 2. Install the Hardware Key by following the steps below. CAUTION! Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord.) (1) Remove the Rear Paper Tray Cover.
274
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP180/190
(4) Disconnect the Speaker Harness. (5) Release the Harness from the Harness Clamp.
(8) Install the Hardware Key into the CN324 connector on the SC PC Board. Note: The connector is keyed, to prevent damage to the SC PC Board, install the Hardware Key as illustrated. Do not force the Hardware Key into the connector if facing the wrong way.
(9) Proceed with the installation of other options. If finished, reinstall all Harnesses, and Covers. (10) Plug the AC Power Cord, and turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position. (11) Reconnect the Telephone Line Cable if it was disconnected. (12) Update the firmware of the unit to the PS/PCL Option firmware. Refer to the attached "Service Notes". (13) Install the PS/PCL6 Software into the PC with the Operating Instructions by following the prompts of the Installation Wizard. (14) Attach the Adobe PostScript 3 Label to the Front Cover as illustrated.
275
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
8.4.
8.4.1.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
8.4.2.
Installation
1. Before installing the Hard Disk Drive Unit, make sure the optional Sorting Image Memory is installed in the memory socket on the SC PC Board first. At least an additional 16 MB (DA-SM16B) of Sorting Image Memory is required. Refer to the Installation Instruction of the Sorting Image Memory (DA-SM16B/64B/28B). 2. For UF-9000, V2.xxxxx or higher SC firmware is required. Update the Firmware referring to the Service Notes Firmware Update. 3. Install the Hard Disk Drive Unit by following the steps below. CAUTION! Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord.) (1) Remove the Rear Paper Tray Cover.
276
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP180/190
(4) Disconnect the Speaker Harness. (5) Release the Harness from the Harness Clamp.
277
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Correct
PCB Side
Incorrect
PCB Side
Note: Make sure that the HDD Harness is connected to the HDD correctly as illustrated.
HDD
HDD
(13) Install the HDD into the HDD Bracket as illustrated. (14) Secure the HDD Bracket with 4 Short Screws (XTB3+4F).
278
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP180/190
(15) Install 1 Harness Clamp (Small). (16) Install the DC PC Board. (17) Secure the DC PC Board with 2 Medium Screws (XTW3+6LFC).
(18) Install the HDD Assembly. (19) Secure the HDD Assembly with 2 Short Screws (XTB3+4F).
(20) Install 2 Harness Clamps (Medium). (21) Connect one end of the HDD Harness to CN143 on the DC PC Board. (22) Secure the HDD Harness with the Harness Clamps.
(23) Install 1 Harness Clamp (Medium). (24) Connect other end of the HDD Harness to CN309 on the SC PC Board. (25) Secure the HDD Harness with the Harness Clamp.
279
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
(26) Reinstall the SC Cover. (27) Secure the SC Cover with 7 Screws. Note: Tuck the Ferrite Core into the SC Cover as illustrated.
(29) Connect the DC Harness to CN141 connector on the DC PC Board, and route the Harness through a hole on the side of the machine. (30) Secure the DC Harness with the Harness Clamps.
280
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP180/190
(32) Secure the DC Harness with the Harness Clamps. (33) Reinstall all Harnesses, and Covers. (34) Plug the AC Power Cord, and turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position. (35) Reconnect the Telephone Line Cable if it was disconnected. (36) Update the firmware of the unit to the PCL Option firmware. Refer to section 8.1 Service Notes of this manual.
281
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
CAUTION!
UF-9000 DP-180/190
<Step sequence of turning OFF the Power Switch> After the Hard Disk Drive Unit is installed, to prevent a Scan Disk Function from being performed (similar to when the power is abruptly interrupted to the PC), it is important to follow the step sequence below when turning OFF the Power Switch on the machine. 1. If the machine is in the "ENERGY SAVER (Shutdown Mode)", you may turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position. If it is not in the "ENERGY SAVER (Shutdown Mode)", continue to step 2 below. 2. Press "FUNCTION" and, "ENERGY SAVER" keys simultaneously first. 3. Wait approximately 10 seconds while the machine writes the closing status onto the Hard Disk Drive Unit, and advances into ENERGY SAVER MODE. 4. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position. 5. Unplug the AC Power Cord. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord.) 6. After finishing the installation of the Hard Disk Drive, please go over the above Power Down procedure with the customer to avoid the Scan Disk Function from being performed (indicated by SCANNING HARD DISK message on the display), and customer inquiries related to abrupt Power Off. 7. Reconnect the Telephone Line Cable if it was disconnected. <Change from 200 to 1,000 Station Address Book> An additional 800 Stations, 1,000 in total available when the optional Hard Disk Drive (DA-HD19) is installed. When installing the HDD unit, the machine automatically changes the address book configuration from 200 to 1,000 Stations, and the addresses that have been already registered will be copied into the HDD automatically. Note: 1) As a precaution, before installing the HDD unit, it is recommended to printout the Address Book information, copy the data using the Network Address Book Editor in the Panasonic-DMS software or RDS as backup. 2) The address book data in the machine is initialized (erased) when the HDD is removed (except for the 200 addresses that were registered on F-ROM of the SC PC Board prior to HDD installation, they will be preserved). 3) When the HDD is removed, the registered address book data remains in the HDD. When reinstalling the HDD again, the registered address book data is still usable in the machine. However, the address book data will be initialized (erased) if the proper shut-down (Step sequence of turning OFF the Power Switch) procedure was not followed. <Using Network Address Book Editor to Transfer the Address Book Data> The registered data in the 200 Station Address Book can be easily copied, and transferred (using copy, and paste) to the 1,000 Station Address Book by using the Network Address Book Editor (NAE). Note: The size, and configuration of the transferred data, varies according to the 200 or 1,000 Fax Address Book. When installing the PDMS, 2 Address Book Editor modules are installed for the UF-9000/DP-180/190. 1) The "UF-9000/DP-180/190" is used for the standard 200 Fax Address Book. 2) The "UF-9000/DP-180/190 (Fax1000)" is used for the 1,000 Fax Address Book. a) An appropriate Address Book Editor module is automatically selected depending on which style of Fax Address Book is activated on the UF-9000/DP-180/190. b) Retrieve the 200 Station, Fax Address Book data from the unit as follows:
282
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
1) Click on START\Programs\Panasonic\Panasonic Document Management System\Network MFP Utilities. 2) Click on Network Device Locator. 3) In the Network Device Locator window, select your desired device. 4) In the menu bar, click on Tools, and in the drop down menu on Address Book Editor. 5) The Network Address Book Editor "UF-9000/DP-180/190" window appears, under the Address Book Editor directory, click on Fax Address Book. 6) When the 200 Station Fax Address Book file is displayed, save the data file by clicking on File\Save As... and type the file name of your choice (i.e. 200 Station). 7) Then click the OK button. c) Change the Address Book of the unit from 200 to 1,000 Stations, using the Service Mode described above. d) Retrieve the 1,000 Fax Address Book (empty) data again from the unit using the same method as above. When the Address Book Editor appears this time, it will show "UF-9000/DP-180/190 (Fax1000)". Save the data file as above, except change to another name (i.e. 1,000 Station). e) Open the 200 Fax data file of step b), and the 1,000 Fax data file of step d). Copy the 200 Fax data, and paste it into the 1,000 Fax data file, add additional desired names to the file, then save it again. (Refer to Help.) f) Transfer the edited 1,000 Fax data file to the unit, by clicking on Transfer, and Write in the menu bar. Close the Network Address Book Editor application after the transfer is successfully completed.
UF-9000 DP180/190
283
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
8.5.
8.5.1.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
This document
Note: 1. The part number(s) may differ depending on the Destination. 2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.5.2.
Installation
CAUTION! Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord.) (1) Remove the Rear Paper Tray Cover.
(4) Disconnect the Speaker Harness. (5) Release the Harness from the Harness Clamp.
284
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP180/190
(8) Remove the Black Pin Protector from Slot 1 (CN327) [Lower], if it was preinstalled. (9) Install 2 PC Board Supporters for the Slot 1 (Lower) on the SC PC Board. (10) Install the Program Expansion Board into Slot 1 (CN327) [Lower] on the SC PC Board, and secure with the Supporters. Note: The Program Extension F-ROM Board must always be installed into Slot 1 (CN327) [Lower] for the PCL or PCL/PS Printer Option to function. (11) Proceed with the installation of other options. If finished, reinstall all Harnesses, and Covers. (12) Plug the AC Power Cord, and turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position. (13) Reconnect the Telephone Line Cable if it was disconnected.
285
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
8.6.
8.6.1.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Note: 1. The part number(s) may differ depending on the Destination. 2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.6.2.
Installation
CAUTION! Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord.) (1) Remove the Rear Paper Tray Cover.
286
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP180/190
(4) Disconnect the Speaker Harness. (5) Release the Harness from the Harness Clamp.
(8) Insert the SDRM PC Board into the Socket on the SC PC Board as illustrated. Note: Make sure to align the notch first, and insert the SDRM PC Board at a 20 - 30 angle into the memory socket, and then lock it down. (9) Proceed with the installation of other options. If finished, reinstall all Harnesses, and Covers. (10) Plug the AC Power Cord, and turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position. (11) Reconnect the Telephone Line Cable if it was disconnected.
287
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
8.7.
8.7.1.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Note: 1. The part number(s) may differ depending on the Destination. 2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.7.2.
Installation
CAUTION! Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord.) (1) Remove the Flash Memory Cover.
(2) Gently insert the Expansion Flash Memory Card as illustrated. Caution: Forcing the card into the slot may cause damage to the card or machine. (3) Reinstall the Cover. (4) Plug the AC Power Cord, and turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position. (5) Reconnect the Telephone Line Cable if it was disconnected.
288
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
8.8.
8.8.1.
UF-9000 DP180/190
Visually check the condition, and contents of the box for completeness, or any shipping damage before installation. Remove all filament tapes, and the packing materials used to secure the Unit during shipment. Qty. 1 1 1 2 2 8 2 1 Description 2nd Paper Feed Module Bracket R Bracket L Bracket Leg Cushion Silver Screw Screw Installation Instructions Part No. ----PJULC0022Z PJULC0023Z See Note PJHRB0701Z See Note See Note PJQMB0132Z This document Remarks
Note: 1. The part number(s) may differ depending on the Destination. 2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.8.2.
CAUTION! Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord.) (1) Remove the Rear Paper Tray Cover.
Installation
(2) Place the machine on top of the 2nd Paper Feed Module aligning with the 2 Guides.
289
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
(4) Install the 2 Brackets from the rear side of the machine as illustrated. (5) Secure the 2 Brackets with 2 Screws.
290
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP180/190
(8) Proceed with the installation of other options. If finished, reinstall all Harnesses, and Covers. (9) Install the Bracket L, and Bracket R as illustrated. (10) Secure the 2 Brackets with 8 Silver Screws.
(12) Install the 2 Rear Legs to 2nd Paper Feed Module. (13) Secure the 2 Rear Legs with 6 Screws.
(14) Connect the Harness of the 2nd Paper Feed Module to the machine. Note: Make sure the Connector is inserted securely as illustrated. (15) Reinstall the 2nd Paper Tray. (16) Reinstall the Rear Paper Tray Cover. (17) Plug the AC Power Cord, and turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position. (18) Reconnect the Telephone Line Cable if it was disconnected.
291
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
(19) Load paper into the 2nd Paper Tray. Caution: Make sure that the paper is set under the Ribs, and that it does not exceed the Max. Level Indicator. You can load up to 550 sheets (20 lb / 75 g/m2).
292
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
8.9.
8.9.1.
UF-9000 DP180/190
This document
Note: 1. The part number(s) may differ depending on the Destination. 2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.9.2.
CAUTION! Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord.) (1) Hook the projections of the Cradle Assembly into the holes on the Left Cover. (2) Connect the Handset Cord to the Cradle Assembly, and the Handset as illustrated.
Installation
(3) Fasten the Cradle Assembly Cable onto the Hooks on the Rear Cover as illustrated.
(4) Remove the Protective Tab covering the HANDSET Jack on the Rear Cover. (5) Connect the Cradle Assembly Cord. (6) Plug the AC Power Cord, and turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position. (7) Reconnect the Telephone Line Cable if it was disconnected.
293
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Remarks
This document
Note: 1. The part number(s) may differ depending on the Destination. 2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.
8.10.2. Installation
CAUTION! Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation. (During a Lightning Storm, to prevent electrocution disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord.) (1) Remove the Rear Paper Tray Cover.
294
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP180/190
(4) Disconnect the Speaker Harness. (5) Release the Harness from the Harness Clamp.
295
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
(11) Install the Mechanical Counter. (12) Secure the Mechanical Counter with 1 Screw. (13) Secure the MC Harness with 3 Harness Clamps. (14) Connect the MC Harness to CN302 on the SC PC Board.
(15) Cut the Protective Tab on the Right Cover. (16) Proceed with the installation of other options. If finished, reinstall all Harnesses, and Covers. (17) Plug the AC Power Cord, and turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position. (18) Reconnect the Telephone Line Cable if it was disconnected.
296
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Network Protocol
OSI Reference Mode
Having a model in mind helps you understand how the pieces of the network puzzle fit together. The most commonly used model is the Open System Interconnection (OSI) reference model. The OSI model, first released in 1984 by the International Standards Organization (ISO), provides a useful structure for defining and describing the various processes underlying networking communications. The OSI model organizes communication protocols into seven layers. Layer 1, the Physical (Hardware) layer, consists of protocols that deal with how data is transferred across the transmission media. At the opposite end, Layer 7, the Application layer, interfaces the network services with the applications (software) in use on the computer. The five layers in between, Data Link, Network, Transport, Session and Presentation - perform intermediate communication tasks. In essence the OSI model is a framework that describes how a function from one computer is transmitted to another computer on the network.
Layer
Name
Function
Protocol
Application
Presentation
NetBIOS, Windows, Sockets, etc...
Session
Transport
TCP, UDP
Network
Datalink
PPP...
NIC SW Hub Repeater Hub
Router
MAC Address
Physical
297
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
One reason for the popularity of TCP/IP is that no one vendor owns it, unlike the IPX/SPX, DNA, SNA or Apple Talk protocol suites, all of which are controlled by specific companies. TCP/IP evolved in response to input from a wide variety of industry sources. Consequently, it is the most open of the protocol suites and is supported by the widest variety of vendors. One huge advantage of using TCP/IP is that, it is required for communication over the Internet, thus the Internet can be used as a communication backbone. TCP/IP was originally designed by ARPANET (Advanced Research Project Agency) in 1969 for the UNIX operating system. In early 1980, UNIX 4.2 BSD version was released. For more detailed information, an RFC (Request for Comment) document is available from the IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force) on the Internet at http://www.ietf.org/. The Internet protocols do no map cleanly to the OSI reference model. The model for the Internet protocol suite has four layers. From the illustration below, you can see the approximate relationship of the layers.
9.1.2.
Protocol
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Layer 7 6 5
OSI Reference Model TCP/IP Base Function This layer embraces functions of the OSI Application Application Session, Presentation and Application Presentation layers. Protocols at this layer provide Session network services. Compares to OSI Transport layer. Transport Transport Enables peer communication between hosts on the internetwork. Network Internet Corresponds roughly to the OSI Network layer. Protocols move data between devices on networks. Corresponds to the bottom two layers of Network Data Link the OSI model. This correspondence Interface enables the TCP/IP protocols to coexist with existing Data Link and Physical layer Physical standards. This layer is concerned with all aspects of transmitting and receiving data on the network.
For the network transmission media at the Physical layer on the OSI reference model, there are several cable categories available. Category 5, 8 wire Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cable is commonly used. Shielded Twisted Pair cables are also available. The Impedance for the STP / UTP Ethernet cable is 100 . Category 3 is also used for the 10Base-T Ethernet. Category 1 2 3 4 5 Purpose Voice grade telephone line ISDN 10Base-T Token Ring (4M) Token Ring (16M) 100Base-TX, ATM (155M)
9.1.3.
Cable
298
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
9.2.
9.2.1.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
The MAC address is burnt into each network card for establishing addresses for nodes on the network. These addresses are hexadecimal in nature and are unique for each card. The First three bytes from the left end identify the manufacturers code that must be approved by IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers). The Remaining three bytes on the right half should be kept in a unique manner. For Ethernet connections, multiple stations share the topology, therefore, the identification packet from each station should be unique.
XXXXXX XXXXXX
Unique value Manufacturer ID PCC : 080023
9.2.2. Network Control
CSMA/CD (Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection) is a network control protocol. If a node is trying to make a link to the network, transmission from another station is prohibited and halted until the data transfer is completed and the link is off. CSMA/CD and Token Passing are typical techniques used to control the connection. The General sequence is as follows: Wait for the next available timing to send, Send out a frame, Perform collision sensing simultaneously, Retry to send the same frame up to 16 times if necessary. (Sequence goes by a binary exponential back-off algorithm to avoid periodical incident) 802.3 (Ethernet) Frame Format
Least significant bit Most significant bit Pre-amble Destination MAC address Source MAC address Data type Data FCS 6 byte 8 byte 2 byte 6 byte 46 1500 byte 4 byte
Destination MAC address: 6 byte (uni-cast or broadcast) If all "1" on 6 byte (FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF) means broadcast frame, it is detected by an applicable node, it must be passed to the upper layer. Also, if the destination MAC address is not matched with that node, the frame is discarded at that node immediately. Token Passing Token passing utilizes a frame called a token, which circulates around the network. A computer that needs to transmit must wait until it receives the token, at which time the computer is permitted to transmit. When the computer is done transmitting, it passes the token frame to the next station on the network. The first station that is powered up on a token-ring network automatically becomes the active monitor station. Its responsibility is to announce itself to the next active downstream station as the active monitor station and request that station to announce itself to its next active downstream station. After each station announces itself to its next active downstream neighbor, the announcing station becomes the nearest active upstream neighbor (NAUN) to the downstream station. After each station becomes aware of its NAUN, the beaconing process continues every seven seconds.
299
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
A computer in the ring captures the token, if it has data to transmit, it holds the token and transmits a data frame. This data frame is passed to each computer in the ring, which checks whether it is the intended recipient of the frame. When the frame reaches the destination address, the destination PC copies the frame to a receive buffer, updates the frame status field of the data frame and puts the frame back on the ring. When the computer that originally sent the frame receives it back from the ring, it acknowledges a successful transmission, takes the frame off the ring, and places the token back on the ring. Token Frame indicates that the network is available for transmission. Data Frame indicates that the network is busy processing a transmission. Token Frame Format
Most significant bit Least significant bit Start De-limiter (SFD) P P P S M R R R End De-limiter (ED) 1 byte 1 byte
P: priority S: Status 0 = Token Frame 1 = Data Frame R: Reserved
Data Frame Format
Most significant bit SFD Access Frame 1 byte Control control 1 byte 1 byte
Data: Max 4429 byte (4M) Max 17779 (16M)
There are several different bit types assigned for Frame Status. For example, 1 and 5 bit indicates that the token has been read, 2 and 6 bit indicates that the frame has been copied by another station. Thus, we can confirm whether the Data Frame was delivered.
300
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
9.2.3.
Ethernet is a very popular local area network architecture based on the CSMA/CD access method. The original ethernet specification was the basis for the IEEE 802.3 specifications. Typically, ethernet networks can use a bus physical topology, although, many varieties of ethernet such as 10Base-T uses a star physical topology and a bus logical topology. (Microsoft uses the term "star bus topology" to describe 10Base-T)
Ethernet
UF-9000 DP-180/190
10Base-5
Speed (bps) Topology Cable Type 10M Bus Yellow cable Star Star
Twisted Pair (Cat. 3, 4, 5) 100 m (328 ft) Twisted Pair (Cat. 5) 200 m (656 ft)
BASE
T
TP Twisted Pair
hyphen "-" means type of cable no "-" means max length Ethernet Configuration
301
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
2
3
6
Straight Cable
Crossed Cable
"1"
"0"
0V
-2.05 V
Out of balance in electrical levels indicates that a collision is occurring in a certain area. To avoid from further malfunctions, terminating the physical end is required for coaxial cables. If a collision is detected, transmission is stopped and a maximum of 4.8 usec. of JAM packet is sent. The node that receives the JAM packet, discards the applicable received data. The maximum timing for collision detection is called slot time, normally set to 49.9 usec. The interval of 9.6 usec to 10 usec after the end of transmission frame is reserved for non-transmission period. There are several merits to Ethernet wiring, the physical connection is easy and flexible for future expansion due to the star topology.
9.2.4.
The main purpose of a repeater is to extend the maximum range for the network cabling. They operate at the OSI Physical layer, and do not filter or interpret the signal - they merely repeat (regenerate) the signal, passing all network traffic in all directions. They perform signal amplitude, delete errors and reschedule the timing. Repeaters also follow the 5-4-3 rule, where no more than 5 network segments connected by 4 repeaters, with no more than 3 of the segments being populated. Active Hubs function in part as repeaters (amplify and regenerate network signals), they occasionally are called multiport repeaters.
Repeater
9.2.5.
NIC is an acronym for Network Interface Card, which plugs into a computer and adapts the network interface to the appropriate standard. ISA, PCI, and PCMCIA cards are all examples of NICs.
302
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
9.3.
9.3.1.
Network Layer
IP Address
UF-9000 DP-180/190
An IP address is a set of four numbers, or octets, that can range in value between 0 and 255. Each octet is separated by a period (i.e. 192.168.31.1). All devices on a network that runs the TCP/IP protocol suite need a unique IP address. Most machines use a Domain Name, which are easier for people to remember. The IP addresses are actually broken down into three distinct classes, knows as class A, class B and class C addresses. Class A IP addresses contain a number between 1 and 127 before the first dot. In class A address, this first octet represents the network address, and the last three octets represent the node or host number. Class B IP addresses can range in value from 128 to 191 for the first octet, but it is the first two octets that make up the network address, and the last two octets that make up the host ID. Class C IP addresses can range in value from 192 to 223 for the first octet, and the first three octets make up the host ID. There are class D and E addresses as well. For these addresses, the first octet is a number greater than 223. These addresses are not currently available to be used and are reserved for other purposes. Class A : First octet reserved for the network address Class B : First two octets reserved for the network address Class C : First three octets reserved for the network address
Class A 0 Class B 1 0
Class C 1 1 0
303
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
9.3.2.
Subnet Mask
UF-9000 DP-180/190
IP 192.168.32.1
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Network Address Configuration
190.0.3.1 255.255.255.0
190.0.3.2 255.255.255.0
190.0.3.3 255.255.255.0
Third Floor
Router
190.0.2.1 255.255.255.0
190.0.2.2 255.255.255.0
190.0.2.3 255.255.255.0
Second Floor
190.0.1.1 255.255.255.0
190.0.1.2 255.255.255.0
190.0.1.3 255.255.255.0
Ground Floor
304
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
9.3.3.
The IP (Internet Protocol) operating at the OSI Network layer, is a connectionless protocol that provides datagram service, and IP packets are most commonly referred to as IP data grams. It performs the following typical functions: 1. Identifies the IP address 2. Packet disassembly and reassembly of the IP datagram 3. Routing of the IP address
Internet Protocol
UF-9000 DP-180/190
4 byte
Version
Internet Header Length
Type Of Service
Total Length
ID Time To Live
Flags
Protocol Source Address Destination Address Option + Padding (size varies) Data
IP Datagram
Terms Version Internet Header Length Type Of Service ID Flags Fragment Offset Time To Live Protocol Header Checksum Source Address Destination Address Option Padding Currently version 4 IP Header field length Service priority requested by IP Datagram (3 bits are reserved for precedence) Identification frame number for upper layer communication Packet disassembly information Offset from most significant bit Decrement the counter until 0 every time packet pass over the router Upper layer protocol identification number. ie TCP (06h), UDP (11h) Checksum is used for error checking on the header data Senders IP Address Destinations IP Address When implemented Fill bit field to add up to 32 bit Detail
305
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
9.3.4.
Routers, operating at the OSI Network layer, organize the large network in terms of logical network segments. Each network segment is assigned an address so that every packet has both a destination network address and a destination device address. Routers are more intelligent than bridges. Not only do routers build tables of network locations, but they also use algorithms to determine the most efficient path for sending a packet to any given network by identifying its header information. These are the typical functions: 1. Routing This controls the traffic according to a specified routing table. 2. Packet Filtering This performs the access and security control for specified routing.
Router
UF-9000 DP-180/190
PC-A 192.168.32.1/24
PC-B 192.168.32.2/24
PC-C 192.168.33.1/24
PC-D 192.168.33.2/24
OK
permission denied
OK
permission denied
306
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
9.4.
9.4.1.
Transport Layer
TCP (Transmission Control Protocol)
UF-9000 DP-180/190
The TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) is an internetwork connection-oriented protocol that corresponds to the OSI Transport layer. TCP provides full-duplex, end-to-end connections. When the end-to-end communication acknowledgement is not required, the UDP (User Datagram Protocol) can be substituted for the TCP at the Transport (host-to-host) level. TCP and UDP operate at the same layer. The UDP is a connectionless oriented protocol.
307
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Client
SYN, Se
quential
No.=453
8970
Server
308
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
9.5.
9.5.1.
Upper Layer
DNS (Domain Name System)
UF-9000 DP-180/190
The DNS (Domain Name System) protocol provides host name and IP address resolution as a service to client applications. DNS servers enable humans to use logical node names, utilizing a fully qualified domain name structure, to access network resources. Domain Names are comprised of 2 or more parts, separated by dots. The part on the left is the most specific, and the part on the right is the most general. A given device may have more than one Domain Name but a given Domain Name points to only one device. For example, the Domain Names below: Panasonic.com Mail.panasonic.com ifax.panasonic.com can all refer to the same device, but each domain name can refer to no more than one device. Usually, all of the devices on a given network will have the same right-hand portion of their Domain Names (i.e. panasonic.com in the examples above). It is also possible for a Domain Name to exist but not be connected to an actual device. This is often done so that a group or business can have an Internet email address without having to establish a real Internet site. In these cases, some real Internet machine must handle the email on behalf of the listed Domain Name. Specification for this name system follows this basic guideline. The name must be separated by dots and must start with ASCII code. Only Alpha numeric and hyphen are available. Up to 63 characters maximum, separated by dots. Up to 255 characters maximum, including all dots. Capital letters and small letters are not identical. (Case Sensitive.)
Panasonic Device
309
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
The Name resolution flow is shown in the illustration above and follows the sequence below: 1. Query the local DNS Server. 2. Query the root DNS Server because the domain belongs to a destination outside of the company. 3. The Com root DNS Server sends the query to the jp root DNS Server. 4. The procedure repeats until a final name resolution is available. 5. The panafax.co.jp server responds with an IP address for the query name. 6. Finally, the name resolution is completed and the destination IP address is determined.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
All DNS servers makes an effort to resolve the query name with an IP address, however, a response is not always sent out every time. Once a name resolution is completed, the information from the DNS Server IP address table is kept in cache memory at each DNS server in accordance with a minimum TTL (Time To Live) of SOA (Start Of Authority) record. There are two types of Name Servers, Primary and Secondary Name Server.
9.5.2.
A primary server has the original copy of a zone file. Any changes made to the zone file are made to the copy on the primary server. When a primary server receives a query about a host name in its own zone, it retrieves the host resolution locally from its own zone files.
9.5.3.
A secondary server gets a copy of zone files from another server. This zone file is a read-only copy of the original file from the primary server. Any changes made to the zone file are made at the primary server, then the changes are copied down to the secondary server through a zone transfer. Multiple secondary servers in a domain improves performance.
310
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
9.5.4.
Each database file starts with a Start of Authority (SOA) record for the file. This record specifies the zone's primary server, the server that maintains the read/write copy of the file. The syntax of this record is as follows: IN SOA <source host><contact email><serial No.><refresh time><retry time><expiration time><TTL> An example of the syntax is shown below:
; ; File: db.127.0.0 file ; Purpose: This file establishes the identity of this DNS. ; SOA stands for 'start of authority' and sets the ; default parameters for information this DNS is ; authorized for: ; @ IN SOA nwr42.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. hostmaster.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. ( 951213 ; serial number 43200 ; refresh every 12 hours ; retry after 2 hours 7200 1209600 ; expire after 2 weeks 172800) ; default ttl is 2 days ; IN NS nwr42.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. 1 IN PTR localhost.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. ;
UF-9000 DP-180/190
311
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
9.5.5.
The A (Address) Record, lists the addresses for a given machine. The name field is the machines name and the address is the network address. There should be one A record for each address on the machine.
A (Address) Record
UF-9000 DP-180/190
; BIND version named 4.9.5-Rel+-Monday-dd-Month-yy ; BIND version GregSchueman-LarryKahn-VirajBais ; zone ' rdmg.pcc.co.jp' last serial 720 ; from 133.185.245.7 at Sun Mmm dd:11:35 yyyy $ORIGIN pcc.co.jp. rdmg IN SOA nwmgr.pcc.co.jp. postmaster.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. ( 721 10800 3600 604800 86400 ) IN NS nwmgr.pcc.co.jp. IN MX 10 mlsv2.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. $ORIGIN rdmg.pcc.co.jp. ifax-gz03 IN A 172.21.94.216 qmc-cco1 IN A 133.185.254.212 ifaxos01 IN A 172.21.97.26 ifpdyna IN A 202.244.202.29
9.5.6.
Pointer records are the reverse-lookup file entries that enable IP addresses to be resolved to host names. DNS is used to resolve host names to IP addresses, so the opposite process is called reverse lookup. They specify the IP address in reverse order (like a DNS name, with the most specific information first) and then corresponding host name. The files are named according to the class of network, but with the octets in reverse order. The syntax for a PTR record is shown below: <ip reverse domain name> IN PTR <host name>
1 ;
IN NS IN PTR
nwr42.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. localhost.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.
The CNAME (or canonical name) record is an alias (nickname), enabling you to specify more than one name for each IP address. The syntax of a CNAME is shown below: <alias name> CNAME <host name> Using CNAME records, you can combine an FTP and a Web server on the same host. Nicknames are useful when a well-known host changes its name. In this case, its usually a good idea to have a CNAME record so people still using the old name, will get to the right place.
312
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
9.5.8.
The Name Server record specifies the other name servers for a domain. The syntax for a name server record is shown below: <domain> IN NS <nameserver host> An example of a name server record follows below: @ IN NS nwmgr.pcc.co.jp The "@" symbol indicates the local domain. The server "nwmgr" in the domain "pcc.co.jp" is the name server.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
9.5.9.
The Mail Exchange (MX) record specifies the name of the host that processes mail for this domain. If you list multiple mail servers, you can set a preference number (value) that specifies the order in which the mail server should be used. Note that lower values indicate higher precedence, and that mailers are supposed to randomize same-value MX hosts so as to distribute the load evenly if values are equal. If the first preferred mail server does not respond, the second one is contacted, and so on. If you want a host to receive its own mail, you should create an MX record for your host's name, pointing at your host's name. The syntax of this record is shown below: <domain> IN MX <preference> <mailserver host> For a more detail, please refer to RFC974 document at URL http://www.ietf.org/.
This is a special domain for allowing address to name mapping. As Internet host addresses do not fall within domain boundaries, this special domain was formed to allow inverse mapping. The IN-ADDR.ARPA domain has four labels preceding it. These labels correspond to the 4 octets of an Internet address. All four octets must be specified even if an octet contains zero. The Internet address 128.32.0.4 is located in the domain 4.0.32.128.IN-ADDR.ARPA. This reversal of the address is awkward to read but allows for the natural grouping of hosts in a network.
9.5.11.
A Slave Server is a server that always forwards queries it cannot satisfy from its cache, to a fixed list of forwarding servers instead of interacting with the name servers for the root and other domains. The queries to the forwarding servers are recursive queries. There may be one or more forwarding servers, and they are tried in turn until the list is exhausted. A Slave and forwarder configuration is typically used when you do not wish all the servers at a given site to interact with the rest of the Internet servers. A typical scenario would involve a number of workstations and a departmental timesharing machine with Internet access. The workstations might be administratively prohibited from having Internet access. To give the workstations the appearance of access to the Internet domain system, the workstations could be Slave servers to the timesharing machine, which would forward the queries and interact with other name servers to resolve the query before returning the answer. An added benefit of using the forwarding feature is that the central machine develops a much more complete cache of information that all the workstations can take advantage of. The use of Slave mode and forwarding is discussed further under the description of the named bootfile commands. There is no prohibition against declaring a server to be a slave even though it has primary and/or secondary zones as well; the effect will still be that anything in the local server's cache or zones will be answered, and anything else will be forwarded using the forwarders list. For more detail, please refer to published book (i.e. DNS and BIND etc) provided from O' Reilly & Associates, Inc. 313
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
Forwarding
9.6.
The objective of Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is to transfer mail reliably and efficiently. SMTP is independent of the particular transmission subsystem and requires only a reliable ordered data stream channel. The SMTP design is based on the following model of communication: as the result of a user mail request, the sender-SMTP establishes a two-way transmission channel to a receiver-SMTP. The receiver-SMTP may be either the ultimate destination or an intermediate. SMTP commands are generated by the senderSMTP and sent to the receiver-SMTP. SMTP replies are sent from the receiver-SMTP to the sender-SMTP in response to the commands. Once the transmission channel is established, the SMTP-sender sends a MAIL command indicating the sender of the mail. If the SMTP-receiver can accept mail it responds with an OK reply. The SMTP-sender then sends a RCPT command identifying a recipient of the mail. If the SMTP-receiver can accept mail for that recipient it responds with an OK reply, if not, it responds with a reply rejecting that recipient (but not the whole mail transaction). The SMTP-sender and SMTP-receiver may negotiate several recipients. When the recipients have been negotiated the SMTP-sender sends the mail data, terminating with a special sequence. If the SMTP-receiver successfully processes the mail data it responds with an OK reply. The dialog is purposely lock-step, one-at-a-time. For more detail, please refer to the URL http:// www.imc.org/rfc821
UF-9000 DP-180/190
SMTP Server
Internet
PC
POP Server
POP 3
PC
9.6.1.
Content-Type
314
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
9.7.
9.7.1.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
The Unit conforms to the ITU T.37 standards and RFC2305. This Internet store and forward facsimile uses approved IETF protocols for posting, relaying and delivery of documents. It requires no changes to Internet standards or to ITU Facsimile Recommendations. Store and forward facsimiles may operate in one of two modes. Communicating in the Simple Mode as defined below provides inter operability. All terminals conforming to this recommendation and capable of reception must be able to receive in Simple Mode. It is recommended that terminals conforming to this recommendation and capable of transmitting should, as a minimum, be capable of transmitting in Simple Mode. Simple Mode supports the transfer of image data. Capability exchange and confirmation of receipt are not required for Simple Mode but may be provided using optional email functions outside the scope of this recommendation.
9.7.2.
Required
Optional
315
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Required
Be SMTP compliant Provide delivery failure notification Be able to process PSTN/FAX email address Comply with the relevant ITU Recommendations relating to facsimile transmission Attempt to relay authorized email to the corresponding G3 facsimile terminals Ensure DSN for delivery failure notification Use DSN for delivery failure notification Use an approved mailbox access protocol when serving multiple users Translate image data into a format acceptable by the receiving G3 facsimile terminal Use a mailbox access protocol when serving a single mail recipient
9.7.3.
316
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
9.7.4.
Sending Internet Fax devices must be able to write minimum set TIFF files, according to the rules for creating minimum set TIFF files defined in TIFF for Facsimile (the S profile) [RFC2301], which is also compatible with the specification for the minimum subset of TIFF-F in [RFC2306]. Receiving Internet Fax devices MUST be able to read minimum set TIFF files. The Following tree diagram shows the relationship among profiles and between profiles and coding methods.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
S (MH)
B/W
Color
C (JPEG)
F (MMR, MR)
J (JBIG)
L (JPEG)
M (MRC)
317
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
9.7.5.
The minimum interchange set of TIFF fields that must be supported by all implementations in order to assure that some form of an image, albeit black-and-white, can be interchanged. The table below summarizes the TIFF fields that comprise the minimal interchange set for black-and-white facsimile. The Baseline and Extenuation fields and fields values must be supported by all implementations. Baseline Fields Bits Per Sample Compression Fill Order Image Width Image Length New Sub File Type Page Number Photometric Interpretation Resolution Unit Rows Per Strip Samples Per Pixel Strip Byte Counts Strip Offsets X Resolution Y Resolution Extensions Fields T4 Options Values 1 3:1 dimension MH coding set T4 Options = 0 or 4 Least significant bit first 1728 (A-4) N: total number of scan lines in image 2: Bit 1 identifies single page of a multi-page document N, m: page number n followed by total page count m 0: pixel value 1 means black 2: inch Number of scan lines per strip = Image length, with one strip 1 Number of byte in TIFF strip Offsets from beginnings of file to single TIFF strip 204, 200 (pixels/inch) 98, 196, 100, 200 (pixels/inch) 0: MH coding, EOLs not byte aligned; 4: MH coding, EOLs byte aligned
Minimal Set
UF-9000 DP-180/190
9.7.6.
A simple method of encoding PSTN addresses in the local-part of Internet email addresses, along with an extension mechanism to allow encoding of additional standard attributes needed for email gateway to PSTN-based services.
Addressing
(1) Offramp
FAX= +12125551212@ panafax.com Global-phone Service selector FAX= +3940 / T33S=183 @ faxworld.org Sub address Selector Global-phone Service selector VOICE = +3940183@ panafax.com Global-phone Service selector
Domain
Domain
(3) Others
Domain
318
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
Note: For RFC2305, a PSTN address in an email address should follow the above style. The key words MUST, MUST NOT, REQUIRED, SHALL, SHALL NOT, SHOULD, SHOULD NOT, RECOMMENDED, MAY, and OPTIONAL in this document are to be interpreted as described in RFC 2119. URL http://www.imc.org/rfc2119
UF-9000 DP-180/190
1. MUST This word, or the terms REQUIRED or SHALL, means that the definition is an absolute requirement of the specification. 2. MUST NOT This phrase, or the phrase SHALL NOT, means that the definition is an absolute prohibition of the specification. 3. SHOULD These words, or the adjective RECOMMENDED, means that there may exist valid reasons in particular circumstances to ignore a particular item, but the full implications must be understood and carefully weighed before choosing a different course. 4. SHOULD NOT This phrase, or the phrase NOT RECOMMENDED means that there may exist valid reasons in particular circumstances when the particular behavior is acceptable or even useful, but the full implications should be understood and the case carefully weighed before implementing any behavior described with this label.
9.7.7.
IFD (Page 0)
Long Values Image Data (Page 0)
IFD (Page 1)
Value Offset
IFD (Page 2)
File Structure
319
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
9.7.8.
In the event of relay failure, the sending relay must generate a failure message, which should be in the format of a DSN.
Delivery Failure
9.7.9.
The Sending Internet Fax devices MUST be able to write minimum set TIFF files, according to the rules for creating minimum set TIFF files defined in TIFF for Facsimile (the S profile), which is also compatible with the specifications for the minimum subset of TIFF-F in F Profile for Facsimile, RFC 2306. The Receiving Internet Fax devices must be able to read minimum set TIFF files.
320
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
9.8.
The set of conventions necessary to achieve facsimile-compatible service covers basic data transport, document data formats, message (document) addressing, delivery confirmation, and message security. Protocol supported by the your Panasonic Device is as follows:
Communication Protocols
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Opening TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 25) 220 sv2.labo.pcc.com Service ready HELO sv2.labo.pcc.com
SMTP Command
250 ef1.labo.pcc.com MAIL FROM: <xxx@sv2.labo.pcc.com> [5 minutes] 250 OK RCPT TO: <yyy@sv2.labo.pcc.com> [5 minutes] 250 OK DATA [2 minutes] 250 Start mail out; end with <CR/LF> . <CR/LF> DATA BLOCK 1
DATA BLOCK
[3 minutes] [3 minutes]
[10 minutes]
250 OK QUIT 221 sv2.labo.pcc.com Service closing transmission channel Closing TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 25)
According to RFC1123, there are two approaches for time-outs in the sender-SMTP: 1. limit the time for each SMTP command separately, or 2. limit the time for the entire SMTP dialogue for a single mail message. A sender-SMTP SHOULD use option (a), per-command timeouts.Timeouts SHOULD be easily reconfigurable, preferably without recompiling the SMTP code. The value of timer [ ] shown above are recommended by RFC1123.
Closing
321
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
9.8.1.
At the time the transmission channel is opened there is an exchange of commands to ensure that the hosts are communicating with the hosts they think they are. The following two commands are used in the transmission channel for opening and closing: HELO:<SP> <domain> <CRLF> QUIT:<CRLF> In the HELO command, the host sending the command identifies itself; the command may be interpreted as saying, Hello, I am <domain>.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
9.8.2.
This command is used to initiate a mail transaction in which the mail data is delivered to one or more mailboxes.
Mail (MAIL)
9.8.3.
This command is used to identify an individual recipient of the mail data; multiple recipients are specified by multiple uses of this command.
RECIPIENT (RCPT)
9.8.4.
The receiver treats the lines following the command as mail data from the sender. This command causes the mail data from this command to be appended to the mail data buffer. The mail data may contain any of the 128 ASCII character codes. The mail data is terminated by a line containing only a period, that is the character sequence <CRLF>.<CRLF>. This is the end of mail data indication.
Data (DATA)
9.8.5.
This command is used to initiate a mail transaction in which the mail data is delivered to one or more terminals. This command is successful if the message is delivered to a terminal.
Send
9.8.6.
This command specifies that the current mail transaction is to be aborted. Any stored sender, recipients, and mail data must be discarded, and all buffers and state tables cleared. The receiver must send an OK reply.
Reset (RSET)
9.8.7.
This command asks the receiver to confirm that the argument identifies a user. If it is a user name, the full name of the user (if known) and the fully specified mailbox are returned.
Verify (VRFY)
9.8.8.
This command specifies that the receiver must send an OK reply, and then close the transmission channel.
Quit (QUIT)
9.8.9.
SMTP is independent of the particular transmission subsystem and requires only a reliable ordered data stream channel. The SMTP design is based on the following model of communication: as the result of a user mail request, the sender-SMTP establishes a two-way transmission channel to a receiver-SMTP. The receiver-SMTP may be either the ultimate destination or an intermediate. SMTP commands are generated by the sender-SMTP and sent to the receiver-SMTP. SMTP replies are sent from the receiver-SMTP to the sender-SMTP in response to the commands.
322
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
9.8.10.
211 220 221 250 251 354 421 450 451 452 500 501 502 503 504 550 551 552 553 554
UF-9000 DP-180/190
323
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
9.9.
9.9.1.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
On certain types of smaller nodes in the Internet it is often impractical to maintain a message transport system (MTS). For example, a workstation may not have sufficient resources (cycles, disk space) in order to permit a SMTP server and associated local mail delivery system to be kept resident and continuously running. Similarly, it may be expensive (or impossible) to keep a personal computer interconnected to an IP-style network for long amounts of time. The Post Office Protocol - Version 3 (POP3) is intended to permit a workstation to dynamically access a mail drop on a server host in a useful fashion. Usually, this means that the POP3 protocol is used to allow a workstation to retrieve mail that the server is holding for it. For more detail, please refer to URL of http:// www.imc.org/rfc1939
9.9.2.
Initially, the server host starts the POP3 service by listening on TCP Port No. 110. When a client host wishes to make use of the service, it establishes a TCP connection with the server host. When the connection is established, the POP3 server sends a greeting. The client and POP3 server then exchange commands and responses (respectively) until the connection is closed or aborted. Commands in the POP3 consist of a case-insensitive keyword, possibly followed by one or more arguments. All commands are terminated by a CRLF pair. Keywords and arguments consist of printable ASCII characters. Keywords and arguments are each separated by a single SPACE character. Keywords are three or four characters long. Each argument may be up to 40 characters long. Responses in the POP3 consist of a status indicator and a keyword possibly followed by additional information. All responses are terminated by a CRLF pair. Responses may be up to 512 characters long, including the terminating CRLF. There are currently two status indicators: positive ("+OK") and negative ("ERR"). Servers MUST send the "+OK" and "-ERR" in upper case. Responses to certain commands are multi-line. In these cases, which are clearly indicated below, after sending the first line of the response and a CRLF, any additional lines are sent, each terminated by a CRLF pair. When all lines of the response have been sent, a final line is sent, consisting of a termination octet (decimal code 046, ".") and a CRLF pair. If any line of the multi-line response begins with the termination octet, the line is "byte-stuffed" by pre-pending the termination octet to that line of the response. Hence a multi-line response is terminated with the five octets "CRLF.CRLF". When examining a multi-line response, the client checks to see if the line begins with the termination octet. If so and if octets other than CRLF follow, the first octet of the line (the termination octet) is stripped away. If so and if CRLF immediately follows the termination character, then the response from the POP server is ended and the line containing ".CRLF" is not considered part of the multi-line response. A POP3 session progresses through a number of states during its lifetime. Once the TCP connection has been opened and the POP3 @server has sent the greeting, the session enters the AUTHORIZATION state. In this state, the client must identify itself to the POP3 server. Once the client has successfully done this, the server @acquires resources associated with the clients mail drop, and the session enters the TRANSACTION state. In this state, the client requests actions on the part of the POP3 server. When the client has issued the QUIT command, the session enters the UPDATE state. In this state, the POP3 server releases any resources acquired during @the TRANSACTION state and says goodbye. The TCP connection is then closed. A server MUST @respond to an unrecognized, unimplemented, or @syntactically invalid command by responding with a negative status @indicator. A server MUST respond to a command issued when the session is in an incorrect state by responding with a negative status indicator. There is no general method for a client to distinguish between a server which does not implement an optional command and a server which is unwilling or unable to process the command.
Basic Operation
324
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
A POP3 server MAY have an inactivity auto logout timer. Such a timer MUST be of at least 10 minutes duration. The receipt of any command from the client during that interval should suffice to reset the auto logout timer. When the timer expires, the session does NOT enter the UPDATE state--the server should close the TCP connection without removing any messages or sending any response to the client.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
9.9.3.
Minimal POP3 Commands: USER name PASS string QUIT STAT LIST [msg] RETR [msg] DELE [msg] NOOP RSET QUIT Optional POP3 Commands: APOP name digest TOP [msg] UIDL [msg] POP3 Replies: +OK -ERR Note: With the exception of the STAT, LIST, and UIDL commands, the reply given by the POP3 server to any command is significant only to "+OK" and "-ERR". The client may ignore any text occurring after this reply. valid in AUTHORIZATION state valid in the TRANSACTION state valid in AUTHORIZATION state
From:
To:
325
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Opening TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 110) +OK POP Server ready <1896.697170952@labo.pcc.com> USER s50055 +OK Password required for s50055 PASS !xxxx +OK s50055 has 2 messages (126040 octets). STAT +OK 2 126040 QUIT +OK POP Server at sv2 signing off. Closing TCP Connection (Port No. 110)
AUTHORIZATION
TRANSACTION
UPDATE
Opening TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 110) +OK POP Server ready <1898.697170952@labo.pcc.com> USER s50055 +OK Password required for s50055
AUTHORIZATION
PASS !xxxx +OK s50055 has 2 messages (126040 octets). TOP 1 1 +OK 69762 octets Text DATA Text DATA PETR 1 +OK 69752 octets Text DATA Text DATA Text DATA :end with .(period) DELE 1 +OK Message 1 has been deleted. TOP 2 1 +OK 1 56288 octets Text DATA Text DATA PETR 2 +OK 1 56288 octets Text DATA Text DATA Text DATA :end with .(period) DELE 2 +OK Message 2 has been deleted. QUIT +OK POP Server at sv2 signing off.
TRANSACTION
UPDATE
326
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Troubleshooting is an art of seeking out the cause of a problem and eliminating the problem by managing of eliminating the cause. No matter what the problem is on your network, the OSI Reference Model serves as an excellent reference tool to help you locate the area of trouble. One of the simplest tools available, is the DOS command-line prompt from your Windows PC. Listed below are the most often used command-line prompts that you can use at the customer's network PC. Some commands are available as an option for checking with more detail. Command Sample Ping Ping 192.168.1.30 Ipconfig /all Purpose Checking for physical connection between your PC and the target destination (192.168.1.30) Ipconfig /all Checking for current network configuration (Host Name, DNS server, IP address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, MAC address, WINS etc) For Windows 95/98/Me, please type winipcfg instead of Ipconfig/all Tracert 192.168.2.245 Checking for the datagram route between your PC and the target destination (192.168.2.245) Netstat Active connection list Netstat -nr Active route for your subnet. All special assigned IP addresses are also shown Net view Checking for the current file sharing Host Name Nslookup Checking for the DNS server IP address. This command is available for Windows NT only.
Note: Before taking corrective action, you must check the physical connections or wiring first.
327
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
9.11. Verifying the Configuration and Mail Account Type (SMTP or POP)
START
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Is the LAN connected to an ISP No No DHCP Client? Is static IP address available ? Yes Is G3 Gateway function being used ? Yes No Yes Is POP account available ? No No No Yes No
Yes Is this a Dialup connection ? Yes Not supported Is there a MX and A Record entry for your Panasonic Device in the DNS table ? No Yes Is POP account available ? Not supported
Is there a MX and A Record entry for your Panasonic Device in the DNS table ? Yes Set network parameters for POP receiving Set network parameters for SMTP receiving If not ready Check the host name by using the DOS command-line "ping" and "nslookup".
Yes
Not supported Set network parameters for POP receiving and set G3 Gateway parameters for your Panasonic Device If not ready Ask the Network Administrator to setup a new POP account. Check the host name by using the DOS command-line "ping" and "nslookup".
If not ready Ask the Network Administrator to setup a new POP account.
Important Notice: Customers wishing to operate a G3 Gateway function for the Panasonic models, the total Network Security such as Anti Spam Mail protection must be aware of how the system performs sufficient security levels as designed. So you may ask the Security Policy Manager to allow relay of messages by changing the configuration of the Massage Transfer Agent like the Sendmail. Otherwise the system will deny any relay operation.
328
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
DHCP is based on the Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP), adding the capability of automatic allocation of reusable network addresses and additional configuration options. The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) provides configuration parameters to Internet hosts. The Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) is a UDP/IP-based protocol which allows a booting host to configure itself dynamically and without user supervision. BOOTP provides a means to notify a host of its assigned IP address, the IP address of a boot server host, and the name of a file to be loaded into memory and executed. Other configuration information such as the local subnet mask, the local time offset, the addresses of default routers, and the addresses of various Internet servers can also be communicated to a host using BOOTP. DHCP consists of two components: a protocol for delivering host-specific configuration parameters from a DHCP server to a host and a mechanism for allocation of network addresses to hosts. DHCP supports three mechanisms for IP address allocation. In "automatic allocation", DHCP assigns a permanent IP address to a client. In "dynamic allocation", DHCP assigns an IP address to a client for a limited period of time (or until the client explicitly relinquishes the address). In "manual allocation", a client's IP address is assigned by the network administrator, and DHCP is used simply to convey the assigned address to the client. A particular network will use one or more of these mechanisms, depending on the policies of the network administrator. "DHCP client" A DHCP client is an Internet host using DHCP to obtain configuration parameters such as a network address. "DHCP server" A DHCP server is an Internet host that returns configuration parameters to DHCP clients. Table 1 describes a DHCP message and its purpose of use. Message Use DHCPDISCOVER Client broadcast to locate available servers. DHCPOFFER Server to client in response to DHCPDISCOVER with offer of configuration parameters. DHCPREQUEST Client message to servers either (a) requesting offered parameters from one server and implicitly declining offers from all others, (b) confirming correctness of previously allocated address after, e.g., system reboot, or (c) extending the lease on a particular network address. DHCPACK Server to client with configuration parameters, including committed network address. DHCPNAK Server to client indicating client's notion of network address is incorrect (e.g., client has moved to new subnet) or client's lease as expired DHCPDECLINE Client to server indicating network address and in use. DHCPRELEASE Client to server indicating network address and canceling remaining lease. DHCPINFORM Client to server, asking only for local configuration parameters; client already has externally configured network address. Table 1: DHCP messages and purpose of use
UF-9000 DP-180/190
329
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
Following figure shows the timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers when allocating a new network address.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Client
Server (selected)
DHCPOFFER DHCPOFFER Collects replies Selects configuration DHCPREQUEST DHCPREQUEST DHCPACK Initialization complete Commits configuration
Timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers when allocating a new network address
Following figure shows the timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers when reusing a previously allocated network address.
Server
Client
Begins initialization
Server
Locates configuration
DHCPREQUEST DHCPACK
DHCPREQUEST DHCPACK
Locates configuration
Initialization complete Subsequent DHCPACKS ignored Timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers when reusing a previously allocated network address
330
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
Several options have been defined so far. One particular option - the "DHCP message type" option - must be included in every DHCP message. This option defines the "type" of the DHCP message. Additional options may be allowed, required, or not allowed, depending on the DHCP message type.
INITIALIZATION
UF-9000 DP-180/190
INITIALIZE/ REBOOT
DHCPNAK/ Restart
-/Send DHCPREQUES
SELECTING
DHCPOFFER/ Collect replies
REBOOTING
REQUESTING
DHCPOFFER/ Discard DHCPACK/ Record lease, set /timers T1,T2
REBINDING
BOUND
T1 expires/ Send DHCPREQUEST to leasing server T1 expires/ Send DHCPREQUEST to leasing server
RENEWING
The client maintains two times, T1 and T2, that specify the times at which the client tries to extend its lease on its network address. T1 is the time at which the client enters the RENEWING state and attempts to contact the server that originally issued the clients network address. T2 is the time at which the client enters the REBINDING state and attempts to contact any server. T1 MUST be earlier than T2, which, in turn, MUST be earlier than the time at which the clients lease will expire. To avoid the need for synchronized clocks, T1 and T2 are expressed in options as relative times.
More detailed information, please refer to RFC2131 document available from following URL. http://www.ietf.org/rfc.html.
331
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
The confirmation of delivery and processing are extensions to "Simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet Mail" [RFC2305]. These are designed to be interoperable with the existing base of mail transfer agents (MTAs) and mail user agents (MUAs), and take advantage of existing standards for advanced functionality such as positive delivery confirmation and disposition notification. The following two features are combined. (1) Delivery confirmation (required) (2) Additional document features (optional) In Internet Mail, the operations of Delivery (to the mailbox) and Disposition (to paper or a screen) may be separated in time (due to store and forwarding of messages) and location (due to separation of delivery agent (MTA) and user agent (MUA)). The confirmations of these two operations are supplied by two different standards-track mechanisms: Delivery Status Notifications (DSN) [RFC1891, RFC1894] and Message Disposition Notifications (MDN) [RFC2298], respectively. Your Panasonic device supports MDN. Delivery Status Notification (DSN) A DSN can be used to notify the sender of a message of any of several conditions: failed delivery, delayed delivery, successful delivery, or the gatewaying of a message into an environment that may not support DSNs. Panasonic Internet FAX does not request DSN while sending.
fail
SMTP Server
DSN
SMTP Server
N returned to sender by Reporting MTAs (Message Transfer Agent) if fail of delivery is occurre
Message Disposition Notifications (MDN) A MDN can be used to notify the sender of a message of any of several conditions that may occur after successful delivery, such as display of the message contents, printing of the message, deletion (without display) of the message, or the recipient's refusal to provide MDNs.
SMTP Server
SMTP Server
MDN
The MDNs are expected to serve several purposes such as allow mail user agents (Outlook Express) to keep track of the disposition of messages sent, by associating returned MDNs with earlier message transmissions.
332
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
For example, you may configure the MDN parameter from Options menu of Outlook Express.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
MDN request
MDN notify
Additional Document Capabilities Section 4 of "A Simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet Mail" [RFC2305] allows sending only the minimum subset of TIFF for Facsimile "unless the sender has prior knowledge of other TIFF fields or values supported by the recipient." A recipient may support any or all (or any combination) of the TIFF profiles defined in RFC 2301, in addition to profile S. As a consequence, a sender may use those additional TIFF profiles when sending to a recipient with the corresponding capabilities.
MDN Response
Read Receipt Capabilities
Internet FAX
(3)
SMTP Server
SMTP Server
(2)
Internet FAX
(1) Request If the sender (Internet FAX) desires processing confirmation, the sender must request Message Disposition Notification when sending the message itself. Sender provides the Disposition-Notification-To field on address using the following formula.
333
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
(2) Recipient's MDN Response Recipient (Internet FAX) starts printing process when the message is received properly. If the Disposition-Notification-To field is contained in message, recipient generates MDN capability response after successful delivery and sends to the address indicated on Disposition-Notification-To field as convey. However, the envelope-from (Return-Path: address) of original sender does not match with address indicated on Disposition-Notification-To field, and then no MDN response is sent.
MDN Response Sample
MESSAGE HEADER Mime-Version: 1.0 X-Mailer: Internet FAX, Panasonic Content-Transfer-Encoding: 7bit Date: Wed, dd Mmm yyyy 15:42:00 -0500 Message-Id: <20020206154203470001.BE948.fax@huge.com> From: <fax@huge.com> Subject: Read Receipt:IMAGE from Internet FAX To: fax@core.mega.edu In-Reply-To: <5.0.2.5.2.20020206153721.00c44448@huge.com> References: <5.0.2.5.2.20020206153721.00c44448@huge.com> Content-Type: multipart/report; report-type=disposition-notification; boundary="+-+-+-Panasonic-+-+-+" ********** Read Receipt **********
BODY TEXT
ATTACHED FILE
Final-Recipient: rfc822;fax@huge.com Original-Message-ID: <5.0.2.5.2.20020206153721.00c44448@huge.com> Disposition: automatic-action/MDN-sent-automatically; dispatched Media-Accept-Features: (& (type="image/tiff") (color=Binary) (image-file-structure=TIFF-minimal) (MRC-mode=0) (ua-media=stationery) (paper-size=[A4,B4,letter,legal]) (image-coding=[MH,MR,MMR]) (| (& (dpi=200) (dpi-xyratio=[200/100,1]) ) (& (dpi=204) (dpi-xyratio=[204/98,204/196,204/391]) ) (& (dpi=408) (dpi-xyratio=408/391) ) ) )
334
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
(3) Processing Confirmation The processing confirmation provided by recipient is received and take specific services for expected several conditions respectively. This is unit independent issue. To see more detailed information, please refer to RFC2532 document.
UF-9000 DP-180/190
335
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
The protocol is designed to provide access to directories supporting the X.500 models, while not incurring the resource requirements of the X.500 Directory Access Protocol (DAP). This protocol is specifically targeted at management applications and browser applications that provide read/write interactive access to directories. When used with a directory supporting the X.500 protocols, it is intended to be a complement to the X.500 DAP. X.500 is an overall model for Directory Services in the OSI world. The model encompasses the overall namespace and the protocol for querying and updating it. A major part of X.500 is that it defines a global directory structure. It is essentially a directory web in much the same way that http & html are used to define & implement the global hypertext web. Anyone with an X.500 or LDAP client may peruse the global directory just as they can use a web browser to peruse the global Web. From the "Start" menu of Windows client PC, you can search for people on the Internet, using of server at directory services.
The base POP3 specification (POP3) also contains a lightweight challenge-response mechanism called APOP. APOP is associated with most of the risks associated with such protocols: in particular, it requires that both the client and server machines have access to the shared secret in clear text form. ChallengeResponse Authentication Mechanism (CRAM) offers a method for avoiding such clear text storage while retaining the algorithmic simplicity of APOP in using only MD5. Normally, each POP3 session starts with a USER/PASS exchange. This results in a server/user-id specific password being sent in the clear on the network. For intermittent use of POP3, this may not introduce a sizable risk. However, many POP3 client implementations connect to the POP3 server on a regular basis to check for new mail. Further the interval of session initiation may be on the order of five minutes. Hence, the risk of password capture is greatly enhanced. An alternate method of authentication is required which provides for both origin authentication and replay protection, but which does not involve sending a password in the clear over the network. The APOP command provides this functionality. A POP3 server which implements the APOP command will include a timestamp in its banner greeting. For example, on a UNIX implementation in which a separate UNIX process is used for each instance of a POP3 server, the syntax of the timestamp might be: <process-ID.clock@hostname> where "process-ID" is the decimal value of the process's PID, clock is the decimal value of the system clock, and hostname is the fully-qualified domain-name corresponding to the host where the POP3 server is running.
336
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Client
Establish TCP connection (TCP port No. 110) Challenge Response <1896.697170952@svr.pcc.co.jp> Digest parameter, Challenge + PASSWD <1896.697170952@svr.pcc.co.jp>PASSWD
Server
+OK POP3 server ready <1896.697170952@svr.pcc.co.jp> APOP USER c4c9334bac560ecc979e58001b3e22fb +OK maildrop has 1 message (369 octets) STAT +OK 1 Continue to follow the POP3 procedure
APOP overview
The POP3 client makes note of this timestamp, and then issues the APOP command. The "name'' parameter has identical semantics to the "name" parameter of the USER command. The "digest" parameter is calculated by applying the MD5 algorithm to a string consisting of the timestamp (including anglebrackets) followed by a shared secret. This shared secret is a string known only to the POP3 client and server. Great care should be taken to prevent unauthorized disclosure of the secret, as knowledge of the secret will allow any entity to successfully masquerade as the named user. The "digest" parameter itself is a 16-octet value which is sent in hexadecimal format, using lower-case ASCII characters. When the POP3 server receives the APOP command, it verifies the digest provided. If the digest is correct, the POP3 server issues a positive response, and the POP3 session enters the TRANSACTION state. Otherwise, a negative response is issued and the POP3 session remains in the AUTHORIZATION state. Note that as the length of the shared secret increases, so does the difficulty of deriving it.
337
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
9.16. SMTP Service Extension for Authentication (SMTP Auth) - Extended Feature
UF-9000 DP-180/190
SMTP is widely deployed and high-quality implementations have proven to be very robust. However, the Internet community now considers some services to be important that SMTP AUTH is an SMTP service extension (ESMTP) whereby an SMTP client may indicate an authentication mechanism to the server, perform an authentication protocol exchange, and optionally negotiate a security layer for subsequent protocol interactions. This extension is a profile of the Simple Authentication and Security Layer (SASL). To use SASL, a protocol includes a command for identifying and authenticating a user to a server and for optionally negotiating protection of subsequent protocol interactions.
Client
Establish TCP connection (TCP port No. 25) 220 smtp.example.com ESMTP server ready EHLO jgm.example.com 250-smtp.example.com 250 AUTH LOGIN DIGEST-MD5 CRAM-MD5 AUTH CRAM-MD5 334 PENCeUxFREJoU0NnbmhNWitOMjNGNndA ZWx3b29kLmlubm9zb2Z0LmNvbT4=
Server
The AUTH command indicates an authentication mechanism to the server. If the server supports the requested authentication mechanism, it performs an authentication protocol exchange to authenticate and identify the user. Optionally, it also negotiates a security layer for subsequent protocol interactions. If the requested authentication mechanism is not supported, the server rejects the AUTH command with a 504 reply.
Challenge Response 334 PENCeUxFREJoU0NnbmhNWitOMjNGNndAZWx3b29kLmlubm9zb2Z0LmNvbT4= Produces a Challenge BASE64 decoded string
<CByLEDBhSCgnhMZ+N23F6w@elwood.innosoft> Genrates Digest parameter Challenge + PASSWD with HMAC (keyed-Hashing for Message USER Authentication Code) roduces a 16 octet digest value of: 9e95aee09c40af2b84a0c2b3bbae786e Fred BASE64 encoded string ZnJlZCA5ZTk1YWVlMDljNDBhZjJiODRhMGMyYjNiYmFlNzg2ZQ==
The authentication protocol exchange consists of a series of server challenges and client answers that are specific to the authentication mechanism. A server challenge, otherwise known as a ready response, is a 334 reply with the text part containing a BASE64 encoded string. The client answer consists of a line 338
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
containing a BASE64 encoded string. If the client wishes to cancel an authentication exchange, it issues a line with a single "*". If the server receives such an answer, it must reject the AUTH command by sending a 501 reply. If the server cannot BASE64 decode the argument, it rejects the AUTH command with a 501 reply. If the server rejects the authentication data, it should reject the AUTH command with a 535 reply unless a more specific error code, such as one listed in Error Codes below, is appropriate. Should the client successfully complete the authentication exchange, the SMTP server issues a 235 reply. The service name specified by this protocol's profile of SASL is "smtp". Error Codes The following error codes may be used to indicate various conditions as described. 432: A password transition is needed This response to the AUTH command indicates that the user needs to transition to the selected Authentication mechanism. This is typically done by authenticating once using the plain authentication mechanism. 538: Encryption required for requested authentication mechanism This response to the AUTH command indicates that the selected authentication mechanism may only be used when the underlying SMTP connection is encrypted. 454: Temporary authentication failure
UF-9000 DP-180/190
This response to the AUTH command indicates that the authentication failed due to a temporary server failure. 530: Authentication required This response may be returned by any command other than AUTH, EHLO, HELO, NOOP, RSET, or QUIT. It indicates that server policy requires authentication in order to perform the requested action.
339
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Direct Internet Fax XMT uses Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) to transfer mail reliably and efficiently. An important feature of SMTP is its capability to transport mail across networks, usually referred to as SMTP mail relay by employing SMTP server. Direct Internet Fax XMT allows you to transmit documents to another Internet Fax directly without using an SMTP Server. For this feature to work reliably, configure the IP Address to remain unchanged (static), ask the Network Administrator to reserve the IP Address. The Subnet Mask and Gateway must be configured as well. The Domain Name of the machine and other record information must be properly registered on the DNS Server. For the Direct Internet Fax XMT to function properly, the DHCP Parameter No. 22 setting must be disabled in the General Settings (For Key Operator). Furthermore, in common cases only email and web service from the Internet are permitted into the corporate intranet, and corporate network administrators are extremely unwilling to open the firewall for other, incoming services, since each opened path represents additional, potential security threats. This makes Direct Internet Fax XMT attractive because it can operate throughout the organization's Intranet. Several new service extensions were assigned. (1) The EHLO keyword value associated with this extension is "CONNEG" (2) A parameter using the keyword "CONNEG" is added to the RCPT-TO command
Sender
Establish TCP connection 220 EHLO 250 Response of CONNEG MAIL FROM:<pcc@panasonic.com> 250 Request for Capability RCPT TO:<june@panasonic.com> CONNEG 250 Capacity Exchange Continue to follow the SMTP procedure
Recipient
TCP Port No. 25
340
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
memo
341
Ver. 3.0 APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
10 Schematic Diagram
10.1. General Circuit Diagram
120 VAC
Power Cord
G N
220-240 VAC
Inlet
L
Power SW
Power Cord
G
Inlet
L
Power SW
Exit Solenoid
EXITSOL_CTL
M
nMMHALF
Fan Motor
LSU
Laser Diode
LSU Motor
M
1 2 3
FANNERR
M
nSNRCLK nSNRCTL nHSYNC nSNRLD 24VGND +24V
1 2
1 2
1 2 3
1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
TST LAMP
TST
nPUCTL_OP
nMOEN_OP CLOCK_OP
nMPOW1
NPURGE
NHSYNC
nPON_OP
nCHGCTL nDBCH
+5VGND
24VGND
24VGND
NVIDEO
nOPTION
NPRINT
NCBSY
NSBSY
NPRDY
24VGND
24VGND
24VGND
24VGND
PSAVE
nTRCTL
nFCTL
nTECTL
+5V(LD)
nFCTL
NRES
CCLK
CN114
T1
1 2
1 2
GND
SPC (SCANNER)
CN306
LCD
nWAKEUP RW_WRD nLPOW1 RESETB nSLPKY
BAT
PNL5
CN261
CN264
pPNLRST
PNLRXD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ADF_PAPER_S2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
PNLTXD
nBOOK
+24V
GND
GND
GND
GND GND
VDD
VSS
DB0
DB1
DB2 DB3
DB4
DB5
DB6
DB7
C4+
C3+
C1+
C2+
Vc1
C1-
C2-
KIN3 KIN4
KIN5
KIN6 GND
RS
PS
PA03
1 2
ADF_STAMP
1 2 1 2 3 4
CN220
CN223
CN230 1 2 3
(PNL CPU)
ADF Motor
PNL1
CN221 1 pin
Scanner Door Sensor
nBook
CN234
CN233
CN231
CN232
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4
PA08
GND
nSLPKY
SCN[11]
SCN[10]
LEDCT0
LEDCT4
LEDCT3
LEDCT2
LEDCT1
LEDCT0
LEDCT1
nLEDAT
SCN[8]
SCN[9]
+ALM SCN[5]
+ACT SCN[6]
SCN[7]
SCN[2]
SCN[0] SCN[1]
SCN[4]
SCN[5]
SCN[3]
SCN[6]
LED9
LED8
LED7
LED6
+SLP
+DAT
KIN4
KIN5
KIN3
KIN6
KIN2
KIN7
KIN1
KIN0
KIN3
KIN2
KIN7
KIN1
DATA
ALARM ACTIVE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
KIN0
GND
GND
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
GND
1 2
PA05
GND
ADF_COVER
PA02
ADF_PAPER_S1
GND
GND
KIN4 KIN6
(10 Keys)
+5VP
PNL4
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
CN257
CN255
CN252
CN256 1 2 3 4 5
CN262
CN254
CN253
CN251
PNL2
(QWERTY Keys)
1 2 3 4 5
CN263
PNL3
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
E_RDB
BZCLK
+24V +24V
1 2 3 ADF_CLUTCH-2 4 VCC(+5VDC) 5 ADF_MOTOR_MODE-2 6 GND 7 ADFPH0-1 8 GND 9 ADFPH1-1 10 ADF_PAPER-S3-2 11 ADFPH2-1 12 ADF_COVER-2 13 ADFPH3-1 14 ADF_PAPER-S1-2 15 ADF_ON_LINE 16 ADF_STAMP-2 17 +5VP 18
ADF_PAPER-S2-2
LEDCT2 LEDCT3
HPMB
VOUT
CSB1
SCN[0] SCN[1]
SCN[2]
+5VP +5V
CCD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
ATRST GND ATD7 ATD8 ATD6 ATD9 ATD5 ATD10 ATD4 ATD11 ATD3 ATD12 ATD2 ATD13 ATD1 ATD14 ATD0 ATD15 GND N.C. N.C. GND ATIOWR GND ATIRD GND ATIORDY N.C. N.C. GND ATAINT IO16 ATA1 N.C. ATA0 ATA2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
TH
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CN300
CN301
CN308
Process Interlock SW
CN501
HVPS
1 +24V KCCNT 2
SC
FRM FRM SLOT1 (60 pin) CN327 FRM FRM SLOT2 (60 pin) CN328 *1 F-ROM CARD F-ROM CARD I/F (68 pin) CN329 HARDWARE KEY I/F (8 pin) CN324 SORT MEMORY SDRAM I / F (72 pin) CN310 Scanner Motor
CN302
LAMP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CN452 2nd Paper Feed Module I/F CN453
5VGND
5VGND
NTOP
+24VIR
+24VIR
+3.3V
+3.3V
+5VP
+24V
+24V
+24V
ZCIN
+24V
+24V
ZCIN
N.C.
N.C.
ZCIN
GND GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
CXD
SXD
N.C.
+5V
+5V
+5V
+24V
+24V
nDB
N.C.
nTR
+5V
+5V
+5V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
2nd Paper Feed Module (OPTION) CN600 CN601
PUSOL_CTL1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
REGSOL_CTL
PUSOL_CTL
1 N.C 2 24VGND 3
nMMCTL
24VGND
24VGND
nTESEN
+5V(LD)
nVIDEO
nMMLD
nLDON
5VGND
5VGND
5VGND
5VGND
5VGND
5VGND
5VGND
FDD8721
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CN002
1 2 3
1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CN143
Neutral: Blue 1 2 3 4 5
+24V GND
Thermistor
CN009 1 2
CN011
CN012
CN013
CN014
CN015
1 2 3
1 2
1 2
CN016
CN017
CN018
CN102
CN2
3 1
CN141
LVPS
CN101
NC ACL
FUSER UNIT
+5V TH
2 1
CN007
Engine Control
CN001
CN005
CN003
CN006
CN008
1 2 3 4 5
CN010
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4
DC
5VGND
+24VIR
+24VIR
+5VSP
+5VSP
PNON
FG
nADUST
FANPER 24VGND
24VGND
24VGND
FG
nEXITSEN
nREGSEN
nTOPSEN
+5V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5
CN004
HDD (OPTION)
1 2 3
1 2 3
CN330
CN331
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
OUT4
INVERTER
1 2 3 4
CN311
NA
P106
TXD-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
+24V
CN1
1 2 3
LAN I/F
CN110
INV_SW
CN322
+24V
T2
HANDSET (OPTION)
EXT. TEL
N.C.
LINE
CN111
T2
N.C.
SPEAKER
L1(R)
T2
P101
FXB
CN305
3 4
L2(T)
3 4
DD+
Registration Sensor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
1 2 +24V 3 +24V 4 +12V 5 +12V 6 VCC(+5VDC) 7 INV-SW-1 8 CDSCLK2 9 CCD-TG 10 GND 11 CCD-RS 12 CCDCLK1 13 CCD-CP 14 AFE-SDI 15 CCD-CK2 16 GND 17 CCD-CK1 18 AFE-SEN 19 ADCLK 20 GND 21 AFE-SCK 22 DB7 23 MODE-SW 24 DB5 25 DB6 26 GND 27 DB4 28 DB3 29 DB2 30 DB1 31 DB0 32
GND
1 2 3
T1
1 2 3 4 5 6
USB I/F
T1
GND
1 2
1 2 3 4
CN113
CN112
VBUS
1 2 3 4
GND
Pick Up Solenoid
ADF
CN1
PA01
PA04
P104
120 / 220-240 VAC +24 VDC +12 VDC +5 VDC +3.3 VDC
V1
V2
V3
V4
V0
P103
STAMP Solenoid
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
6 8 16 14 12 10 4 2
13 15 17 1 3 5 7 9 11 18
P603
Cover Sensor
1 2
nSCNDOR
nLEDALM
nLEDACT
nLEDSLP
Model
*1 : Japan specification only
Paper Sensor
UF-9000 DP-180/190
Ver. 3.0
342
1 2 3 4 5 6
NB
TXD+
1 2 +3.3V 3 GND 4 GND 5 CT1 6 RXD+ 7 RXD8 YLA 9 YLK(GND) 10 GLK(GND) 11 GLA 12
1 2 3 4
VCC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
+24V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
P105
CN309
OUT3
+24V
1 2 3 4
OUT1 OUT2
1 2 3 4
1 4
CN2
nEBCWBE[0]
CN304
EBC3D[7] EBC3A[20]
EBC3A[21]
EBC3A[22]
EBC3A[23]
EBC3A[24]
EBC3A[25]
EBC3A[26]
EBC3A[27]
EBC3A[28]
EBC3A[29]
EBC3A[30]
EBC3A[31]
nMDMRST
nFXBWUP
P102
n5VMTON
nHKOF5V
EBC3D[0]
EBC3D[1]
EBC3D[2]
EBC3D[3]
EBC3D[4]
EBC3D[5]
EBC3D[6]
nMDMINT
nFXBSET
nCSMON
nEBCOE
nMVOL0
nMVOL1
nMVOL2
pCMLD
BZCLK
+3.3V
+5VB
+5VP
+24V
GND
GND
1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6
APR 2006
UF-9000 DP-180/190
memo
Ver. 3.0
343
APR 2006
88
Panasonic
Software
Operating Instructions
Network Firmware Update Tool
(Service Tool)
Version 3
DZSD001829-13
Table of Contents
1.
1.1 1.2
General
2.
2.1 2.2 2.3
Installation
Installing the Network Firmware Update Tool .......................................................................................... 4 Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool ........................................................................................ 4 Uninstalling the Network Firmware Update Tool...................................................................................... 5
3.
3.1 Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code..................................................................................... 6 3.1.1 For DX-600 / DX-800 (v1.31 or higher) 6 3.1.2 For other models 6 3.2 Preparing the Firmware Code .................................................................................................................. 6
4.
1st Edition : 2nd Edition : 3rd Edition : 4th Edition : 5th Edition : 6th Edition : 7th Edition : 8th Edition : 9th Edition : 10th Edition : 11th Edition : 12th Edition : 13th Edition :
2002 March 20 2002 August 1 2002 December 5 2003 April 10 2003 April 22 2003 December 18 2004 April 7 2004 August 3 2004 August 20 2004 October 22 2005 March 18 2006 March 27 2006 Ma 08
Windows and Windows NT are registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Copyright 1999 - 2006 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Unauthorized copying and distribution is a violation of law. The contents of these Operating Instructions are subject to change without notice.
Page 2
1. General
The Network Firmware Update Tool allows a Panasonic Fax/Copy machine connected via LAN (TCP/IP) to program the Firmware Code Memory of the Unit directly. Using a PC, the firmware code is transferred to the Firmware Code Memory of the Unit through the LAN.
1.1 Supporting OS
This application software operation has been confirmed under the following OS Windows 98 / Me Windows NT 4.0 Windows 2000 Windows XP
Page 3
2. Installation
2.1 Installing the Network Firmware Update Tool
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1. 2.
Start Microsoft Windows. For Windows NT 4.0 / 2000 / XP, logon to the computer/network with an account that can add, or change configurations (i.e. Administrator). Run \xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\Setup\Setup.exe from the setup disk or folder. Enter the installation password. Please ask your Sales Company to obtain the password. Follow the instruction on your screen to install the program. The completion message is displayed when the installation is completed. Check Yes, I want to and click [Finish] to restart your PC.
File Selection Tab Auto-Select Update Mode When you select this mode, the tool acquires the type of firmware and version from the device(s) of the specified address, and updates the device to the latest version from the Local Firmware Folder. However, this mode cannot change the type of firmware, so you must use the manual mode when changing from the standard firmware to the option firmware.
3.
Page 4
1. 2. 3. 4.
Start Microsoft Windows. For Windows NT 4.0 / 2000 / XP, logon to the computer/network with an account that can add, or change configurations (i.e. Administrator). Click the Start button on the Taskbar, point to Programs, Panasonic, Panasonic Firmware Update, then click Uninstall Network Firmware Update Tool. Follow the instructions on your screen to uninstall (Remove) the program. The completion message is displayed when the uninstall is completed.
Page 5
1. 2.
3.1.2
1.
2.
Make sure the device is not in an operating condition (copying or printing etc...). Note: It is recommended to update the firmware at night due to lower activity of the device.
Page 6
2.
From the Windows Desktop, double-click on the Network Firmware Update shortcut icon to start the Network Firmware Update Tool. Click [Next>].
Note: 1) Make sure the device password (Service Mode F7-01 = Key Operator ID Code, or Operation Password) on the remote unit and the password on this application are set correctly. 2) Make sure the remote unit is not in an operating condition (Copying or Printing etc...). 3) Do not run other applications on this PC while it is transferring the firmware data to the remote unit, or a communication error may occur. 4) Do not operate, or reset the power of the device while it is updating the firmware code, or the firmware update will fail, and the device will not boot up again. 5) If the Network Firmware Update fails, and the unit does not reboot automatically for more than 20 minutes, you may need to recover the firmware update again via a Parallel/USB port using the Local Firmware Update Tool, or with the FROM card.
3.
Page 7
5.
Page 8
Page 9
6a3
Extracting...
6a4
Select the Firmware Type window appears. Select the Firmware Type, and click [OK].
6a5
Page 10
6b2
Select the Parent File Folder, and Click [OK]. Ex: \DP-2310_3010_PU_030228
6b3
Page 11
6c1
Select Independent File Folders Select "Select Independent File Folders", and click [Browse...] button.
6c2
Select the Firmware Code File Folder, and click [OK]. Ex: SFDL2PNLAAV100000_PU.BIN
Page 12
6c4
7.
The version check for the specified devices starts. Click [Next>].
Page 13
9.
Confirm the destination device(s) again. Set timer communication if necessary. Then click [Next>].
Page 14
Network Firmware Update Tool (LAN) 11. When the transfers are completed, all jobs in
Click [Finish] to close the tool. After each firmware code is successfully programmed to the Firmware Flash Memory in the unit, the unit reboots and restarts again automatically. the spooler disappear, and the communication log is displayed.
Page 15
Published in Japan
Panasonic
Software
Operating Instructions
Local Firmware Update Tool
(Service Tool)
Version 3
DZSD000965-16
Table of Contents
1.
1.1 1.2
General
2.
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4
Installation
Installing the Hardware on the Panasonic Fax/Copy Machine ................................................................ 4 Installing the Local Firmware Update Tool............................................................................................... 4 Installing USB Firmware Update Driver (For the USB Port Model Only) ................................................. 5 Uninstalling the Local Firmware Update Tool .......................................................................................... 6
3.
3.1 3.2
Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code..................................................................................... 7 Preparing the Firmware Code .................................................................................................................. 7
4.
1st Edition : 2nd Edition : 3rd Edition : 4th Edition : 5th Edition : 6th Edition : 7th Edition : 8th Edition : 9th Edition : 10th Edition : 11th Edition : 12th Edition : 13th Edition : 14th Edition : 15th Edition : 16th Edition :
1999 February 10 1999 September 30 2000 September 8 2000 November 28 2001 June 20 2001 September 7 2003 April 10 2003 April 22 2003 December 18 2004 January 19 2004 February 10 2004 April 20 2004 August 3 2004 August 20 2004 October 22 2005 March 18
Windows and Windows NT are registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Copyright 1999 - 2005 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Unauthorized copying and distribution is a violation of law. The contents of this Operating Instructions are subject to change without notice.
Page 2
1. General
The Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel/USB) allows a Panasonic Fax/Copy machine to emulate a Flash Memory Card Writer and create a Master Firmware Card, or to program the Firmware Code Memory of the Unit directly. Using a PC, the firmware code is transferred to the Flash Memory Card or the Firmware Code Memory of the Unit through the Parallel/USB Port on the Panasonic Fax/Copy machine. The installation and operation are very similar to the Printer Interface.
1.1 Supporting OS
This application software operation has been confirmed under the following OS Windows 98 / Me Windows NT 4.0 (Parallel Port only) Windows 2000 / XP
Page 3
2. Installation
2.1 Installing the Hardware on the Panasonic Fax/Copy Machine
1 2
Please install the Parallel Port/USB Port Assembly into one of the supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier models by following the appropriate option installation instructions for that model. Prepare the Parallel cable or USB cable for connecting the Panasonic Fax/Copy machine and your PC.
Important: For the USB port models, do not connect the USB cable yet.
2.2 Installing the Local Firmware Update Tool
Start Microsoft Windows. For Windows NT4.0 / 2000 / XP, log onto the computer/network with an account that can add or change printer configurations (i.e. Administrator).
Important: For the USB port models, do not connect the USB cable yet.
2 3
Page 4
Copying...
The installation is completed. Check Yes, I want to and click [Finish] to restart your PC.
2.3
Installing USB Firmware Update Driver (For the USB Port Model Only)
After installation of the Local Firmware Update Tool, if you need to install the USB Firmware Update Driver, please set the unit to "Update from USB/* IN PROGRESS *" in the Service Mode first, and then connect the USB Cable. The required Driver will then be installed automatically. Note: For instructions of how to get into the Service Mode, refer to your machine's Service Manual.
Searching...
Installing driver...
3
Note:
When the install screen disappears, the installation of the Firmware Update (USB) Driver is completed.
1. The installation screens will vary, and are dependant on the OS. 2. For Windows 2000 or XP, through the "Digital Signature Not Found" or "Software Installation" window will be displayed during the installation and indicate "Unknown software package" or "not passed Windows Logo testing", please click [YES] or [Continue Anyway] button to continue the installation 3. If you are asked for the Inf file location, please specify the following folder. C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\UsbDrv1 4. After the USB Firmware Update Driver is installed, and you are not updating the machine's firmware at this time, turn the Power Switch OFF and ON again to return your machine to the Standby mode.
Page 5
1. 2. 3. 4.
Start Microsoft Windows. For Windows NT 4.0 / 2000 / XP, logon to the computer/network with an account that can add or change configurations (i.e. Administrator). Click the Start button on the Taskbar, point to Programs, Panasonic, Panasonic Firmware Update then click Uninstall Local Firmware Update Tool. Follow the instructions on your screen to uninstall (Remove) the program.
Note: The Firmware Update Driver is not deleted by the Uninstaller. Please delete it from the Control Panel\Printers folder by manually. When you delete USB Firmware Update Driver, please delete it after you connect the PC to the unit with the USB cable and driver enabled, or it cannot be deleted properly.
Page 6
Page 7
Set the machine to the Firmware Update Mode and then connect the unit and PC with a Parallel cable or USB cable. Note: For the USB Port Models, the Plug & Play of the Printer mode is activated when the USB cable is connected without the unit set in the USB Firmware Update Mode. If this happens, please click the [Cancel] button for the Plug and Play Driver installation.
Please close the all applications that are currently running. Also ensure that the Status Monitor and/or Port Controller are closed. If they are running, right click on the icons in the system tray and select Exit/End. Note: About Windows 2000/XP, using Network Firmware Update Tool, the authority more than a Power User is required.
Status Monitor
Port Controller
From the Windows Desktop, double-click on the Local Firmware Update Tool shortcut icon to start the Panasonic Firmware Programming Wizard. Click [Next>].
Note: Please close all applications that are currently running. Also ensure that the Status Monitor and/or Port Controller are closed. If they are running, right click on the icons in the system tray and select Exit/End.
Note: The Firmware Update Driver (USB) is only displayed if you installed it with the unit Plug and Play.
Page 8
Specify the Firmware Code File by the following methods. Select an Archive File (Complete Set) --> Step 5a1 You can select the Firmware Code Archive File directly here. The selected archive file will be extracted into the local \Data folder automatically and it is chosen as a set when the update of multiple firmware code files are necessary. Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set) --> Step 5b1 If the archive file is already extracted into the local \Data folder, you can select the Parent File Folder directly here. It is chosen as a set when the update of multiple firmware code files are necessary. Select an Independent File --> Step 5c1 If the archive file is already extracted into the local \Data folder, you can select an independent file here. When updating multiple firmware files, you must repeat the file selection operation.
5a1
Select an Archive File (Complete Set) Select "Select an Archive File (Complete Set)" and click [Browse...] button.
5a2
ex. DP-2310_3010_PU_030227.exe
5a3
Extracting...
Page 9
5a5
Page 10
Select "Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set)" and click [Browse...] button.
5b2
ex. \DP-2310_3010_PU_030327
5b3
Page 11
Page 12
5c2
ex. SFDL2PNLAAV100000_PU.BIN
5c3
Page 13
The selected Firmware Code File(s) are indicated. Uncheck the box if you do not need to transfer a file.
On the unit side: Set the unit to the Firmware Update Mode.
Click [Next>].
The Firmware Code File starts transferring. When there is more than one file to be updated, the operation will be the following;
For USB connected unit: they are transferred in turn automatically if the unit is ready to receive the next firmware code file. Note: If you are updating the DP-2310/3010, the sending of sequential multiple files to the unit isn't done automatically. The "Waiting..." display on the PC will not advance to "Executing..." until you set the unit back to USB Firmware Update on the machine to start receiving the next file. See Unit information of the Firmware Update Mode on the next page. For Parallel connected unit: the confirmation screen is displayed when the current firmware code file transfer is finished and there are remaining firmware code files. Click [OK] when the machine is ready to receive the next file.
Page 14
When the transfers of all the firmware files are finished, click [Finish] to close the tool.
Note: For USB Connected Unit only. When the unit returns to standby, Plug and Play of the printer will popup. Click [Cancel] to close the Printer Plug and Play window.
Page 15
Published in Japan